- Manuals
- Brands
- Honda
- Car
- Accord Coupe
- Navigation Manual
Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual PDF
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 0
California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
00X31-T3L-6301 2016 Accord Coupe O
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
wner's Manual Ver. 2 AOM02516
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 1
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
Safety Labels - on the vehicle. Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.
3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 2
Contents
This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owners manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
This owners manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 29 For Safe Driving P. 30 Seat Belts P. 34 Airbags P. 41
2 Instrument Panel P. 69 Indicators P. 70 Gauges and Displays P. 98
2 Controls P. 115 Clock P. 116 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 118 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 139 Adjusting the Seats P. 161
2 Features P. 185 Audio System P. 186 Audio System Basic Operation P. 192, 215 Customized Features P. 298, 316 HomeLink Universal Transceiver* P. 340
2 Driving P. 411 Before Driving P. 412 Towing a Trailer P. 417 Refueling P. 497 Fuel Economy P. 499
2 Maintenance P. 501 Before Performing Maintenance P. 502 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 535 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 549
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 555 Tools P. 556 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 557 Overheating P. 570 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 572
2 Information P. 581 Specifications P. 582 Identification Numbers P. 586 Emissions Testing P. 589 Warranty Coverages P. 591
Contents
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 3
Child Safety P. 54 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66 Safety Labels P. 67
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 129 Security System P. 133 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 136 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 140 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 159 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 169 Climate Control System P. 180
Audio Error Messages P. 286 General Information on the Audio System P. 291 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 343, 374 Compass* P. 409
When Driving P. 421 Braking P. 479 Parking Your Vehicle P. 491 Accessories and Modifications P. 500
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 513 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 529 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537 Battery P. 546 Remote Transmitter Care P. 547 Cleaning P. 550
Engine Does Not Start P. 563 Jump Starting P. 566 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 569 Fuses P. 576 Emergency Towing P. 580
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 587 Reporting Safety Defects P. 588 Authorized Manuals P. 593 Customer Service Information P. 594
Quick Reference Guide P. 4
Safe Driving P. 29
Instrument Panel P. 69
Controls P. 115
Features P. 185
Driving P. 411
Maintenance P. 501
Handling the Unexpected P. 555
Information P. 581
Index P. 598
4
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 4
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
System Indicators (P 70)
Gauges (P 98)
Information Display* (P 99)
Audio System (P 192, 215)
ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 141)
Rear Window Defogger (P 155)
Ignition Switch*1 (P 140)
ECON Button (P 441)
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System OFF) Button (P 472)
Parking Sensor System Button* (P 493)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button* (P 475)
Hazard Warning Button
Audio/Information Screen (P 193, 216)
Multi-Information Display* (P 102)
Navigation System* () See Navigation System Manual
Audio/Information Touch Screen* (P 218)
Auxiliary Input Jack* (P188)
Climate Control System (P 180)
Heated Mirror Button* (P 155)
Center Pocket (P 172)
Seat Heater Switches* (P 179)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button* (P 461)
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button* (P 486)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 5
(+ / (- / / Buttons (P 190)
SOURCE Button (P 190)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink System Voice Control Buttons (P 343, 374)
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons* (P 235), () See Navigation System Manual
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 158)
Wipers/Washers (P 152)
Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P 432, 436)
Brightness Control (P 154)
(Select/Reset) Knob (P 99)
(Display) Button (P 193, 216)
Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P 432, 436)
LaneWatchTM*(P 473)
Fog Lights* (P 147)
Headlights/Turn Signals (P 145)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons* (P 448)
(Information) Buttons* (P 102)
SEL/RESET Button* (P 103)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button* (P 466)
Horn (Press an area around .)
Cruise Control Buttons (P 442)
Distance Button* (P 455)
MENU Button* (P 190)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
6
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 6
Door Mirror Controls (P 160)
Passengers Front Airbag (P 44)
Parking Brake (P 479)
Glove Box (P 171)
Rearview Mirror (P 159)
Hood Release Handle (P 515)
Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 128)
Power Window Switches (P 136)
Interior Fuse Box (P 578)
Drivers Front Airbag (P 44)
Trunk Main Switch* (P 131)
Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 498)
Trunk Release (P 129)
Shift Lever Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (P 430)
Automatic Transmission (P 434)
Manual Transmission (P 438)
USB Port (P 187)
Accessory Power Socket (P 174)
Wireless Charger* (P 175)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 7
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 63)
Sun Visors
Vanity Mirrors
Map Lights (P 170)
Front Seat (P 161)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)
Side Curtain Airbags (P 50)
Grab Handle
Ceiling Light (P 169)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 61)
Rear Seat (P 168)
Accessory Power Socket (P 174)
Sunglasses Holder (P 178)
Moonroof Switch* (P 139)
Seat Belts (P 34)
Side Airbags (P 48)
Coat Hook (P 177)
USB Port* (P 187)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
8
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 8
Maintenance Under the Hood (P 513)
Windshield Wipers (P 152, 535)
Tires (P 537, 557)
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 121)
Power Door Mirrors (P 160)
Headlights (P 145, 529)
How to Refuel (P 498)
High-Mount Brake Light (P 534)
Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 132)
Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 129)
Parking Lights (P 145, 531, 532)
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 145, 531, 532)
Fog Lights* (P 147, 531)
Multi-View Rear Camera (P 496)
Trunk Release Button* (P 130)
Brake Lights (P 533)
Rear Side Marker/Taillights (P 533)
Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 533)
Back-Up Lights (P 533)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 9
Eco Assist System (P 441)
Ambient Meter Changes color to reflect your driving
style. Green: Fuel efficient driving Light green: Moderate acceleration/ deceleration White: Aggressive acceleration/ deceleration
The ambient meter color changes in accordance with your brake or accelerator pedal operation.
ECON Button (P 441) Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 81) Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
Ambient Meter
The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.
Models with multi-information display
* Not available on all models
10
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 10
Safe Driving (P 29)
Airbags (P 41)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 54)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 66)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P 33)
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P 34)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.
Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 11
Instrument Panel (P 69)
Canada
U.S.
Low Fuel Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Canada
U.S.
Washer Level Indicator*
System Indicators Malfunction Indicator Lamp Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator
VSA OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Lights Indicators Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*
Immobilizer System Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
System Indicators
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator*
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber)*
CRUISE MAIN Indicator*
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Security System Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator*
Gauges (P 98)/Information Display* (P 99)/ Multi-Information Display* (P 102)/System Indicators (P 70)
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
System Indicators
Temperature Gauge
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator
Maintenance Minder Indicator*
Smart Entry System Indicator*
Starter System Indicator*
System Message Indicator*
ECON mode Indicator
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator*
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator* Light Control Indicator*
Door and Trunk Open Indicator
Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Canada
U.S.
Models with information display
Models with information display
Auto High-Beam Indicator (Green)*/ Auto High-Beam Indicator (Amber)*
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)*
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White)*
Parking Sensor System Indicator*
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (White)*
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
M (Sequential Shift Mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator
Automatic transmission models
* Not available on all models
12
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 12
Controls (P 115)
Clock (P 116)
The audio system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.
a Select , then select Settings.
b Select Clock/Info, then Clock Adjustment.
c Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting / .
d Select OK to set the time.
Models with two displays
3 4
a Enter the Clock Adjustment screen. 2 Adjusting the Clock (P 116)
b Rotate to change hour, then press .
c Rotate to change minute, then press .
Models with one display
Press the button to change the vehicles power mode.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 13
Turn Signals (P 145)
Lights (P 145)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers (P 152)
*1:Vehicle with auto wiper *2:Vehicle without auto wiper
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring (-: Low Sensitivity*1
(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2
(+: High Sensitivity*1
(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2
MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
Steering Wheel (P 158)
To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Doors from the Inside (P 126)
Pull either door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks the passengers door.
* Not available on all models
14
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 14
Trunk (P 129)
To unlock and open the trunk: Pull the trunk release. Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote. Press the trunk release button* on the
trunk lid.
Trunk Release
Power Door Mirrors (P 160)
With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P 136)
With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, the passengers window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), the passengers window switch is disabled.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Power Window Lock Button
Window Switch
Indicator
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 15
Climate Control System (P 180)
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. Press the button to turn the system on or off. Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 235) Models with navigation system
Drivers Side Temperature Control Buttons
(Windshield Defroster) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard vents.
AUTO Button
(On/Off) Button
(Recirculation) ButtonMODE Control Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passengers Side Temperature Control Buttons
* Not available on all models
16
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 16
Features (P 185)
Audio Remote Controls (P 190)
(+ / (- Button Press to adjust the volume up/down.
SOURCE Button
FMAMCDUSBiPod Bluetooth AudioPandora*AUX
FMAMSiriusXM*CDUSBiPod Pandora*Bluetooth AudioAudio Apps
(+ / (- / / Button
SOURCE Button
Models with one display
Models with two displays
/ Button Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station.
CD/USB device: Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 17
Audio System (P 192, 215)
(P 192)Models with one display
Audio/Information Screen
BACK Button
FM/AM Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
Selector Knob
Button
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
CD Button AUX Button CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
SETTINGS Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
PHONE Button
MENU Button
DISP Button
* Not available on all models
18
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 18
(Power) Button
(HOME) Icon
VOL (Volume) Icons
(MENU) Icon
(BACK) Icon
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
App List
(P215) For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual Models with two displays
MAP *
*
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 19
Driving (P 411)
M Indicator
Shift Indicator
Manual Transmission* (P 438)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)* (P 430)
Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting
Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.
Neutral Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S) Better acceleration. Increased engine
braking. Going up or down
hills. 7-speed manual shift
mode can be used.
Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.
Press the release button to move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.
Reverse Used when reversing.
Drive Normal driving. 7-speed mode can be used
temporarily.
Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode (P 432) Allows you to manually shift
the transmission up or down without removing your hands from the steering wheel.
When the shift lever is in (S Pulling a paddle shifter changes
the mode from continuously variable transmission (CVT) to 7-speed manual shift mode.
The M indicator and the selected speed number are displayed in the shift indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission (CVT) to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is displayed in the shift indicator.
Shift Lever
Release Button
* Not available on all models
20
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 20
Automatic Transmission* (P 434)
Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting
Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.
Neutral Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S) Sequential shift mode can be used.
Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.
Press the release button to move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.
Reverse Used when reversing.
Drive Normal driving. D-paddle shift mode can be used
Shift Lever
Release Button
M Indicator
Gear Position Indicator
Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter
Paddle Shifters (P 436) Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.
D-paddle shift mode: The transmission will shift back to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising.
Sequential shift mode: Holds the selected gear, and the M indicator comes on.
The selected gear position is shown in the instrument panel.
Selected Gear Number
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 21
VSA OFF Button (P 472)
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To turn VSA on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P 442)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To use cruise control, press the CRUISE*/ MAIN* button, then press the /SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 475)
Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button* (P 483)
When a possible collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
* Not available on all models
22
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 22
Refueling (P 497)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)
a Push the fuel fill door release handle.
b Turn the fuel fill cap slowly to remove the cap.
c Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.
d After refueling, screw the cap back on until it clicks at least once.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 23
Maintenance (P 501)
Under the Hood (P 513)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake fluid and clutch* fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard.
b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up the hood.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.
Lights (P 529)
Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P 535)
Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield.
Tires (P 537)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter driving.
* Not available on all models
24
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 24
Handling the Unexpected (P 555)
Flat Tire (P 557)
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the trunk.
Indicators Come On (P 572)
Identify the indicator and consult the owners manual.
Engine Wont Start (P 563)
If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P 576)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Overheating (P 570)
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing (P 580)
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 25
What to Do If
*1:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
The ignition switch does not turn from (0 to (q. Why?
The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?
The steering wheel may be locked.
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right while turning the ignition key.
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.
The ignition switch does not turn from (q to (0 and I cannot remove the key. Why?
The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system*1
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system*1
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system*1
25
26
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 26
Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.
Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors using a remote transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?
The beeper sounds when: The key is left in the ignition switch*. The power mode* is in ACCESSORY. The exterior lights are left on.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 27
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when: Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
28
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 28
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 29
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 30 Your Vehicles Safety Features............ 32 Safety CheckList................................. 33
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 34 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 37 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 40
Airbags Airbag System Components............... 41 Types of Airbags ................................ 44 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 44
Side Airbags ...................................... 48 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 50 Airbag System Indicators.................... 51 Airbag Care ....................................... 53
Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 54 Safety of Infants and Small Children.......56 Safety of Larger Children ................... 64
Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 66
Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 67
29
30
Safe D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 30
For Safe Driving
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.
Important Safety Precautions Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.
Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.
Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Safety Precautions Safe D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 31
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
31
32
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicles Safety Features
Safe D rivin
g
1Your Vehicles Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 32
Your Vehicles Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
7
7
99
8
8
10
10
6
11
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety CheckList Safe D
rivin g
1Safety CheckList
If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close both doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 77
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 33
Safety CheckList For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure both doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126
Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 161
Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 164
Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 37
Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a childs age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 54
33
34
Safe D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 34
Seat Belts
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow the belt to extend fully without locking.
3WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
About Your Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body.
The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats. 2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 61
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D
rivin g
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 54
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 35
Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 before the drivers seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver does not fasten the belt before the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and the indicator will blink while driving until the drivers and front passengers seat belts are fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Seat Belt Reminder
*
Continued 35* Not available on all models
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
36
Safe D rivin
g
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 36
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to- severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D
rivin g
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 37
Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 161
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Pull out slowly.
Correct Seated Posture.
Latch Plate
Buckle
37Continued
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
38
Safe D rivin
g
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 38
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.
Lap belt as low as possible
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D
rivin g
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 39
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
39
40
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe D rivin
g
1Seat Belt Inspection
3WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 40
Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 41
Airbags
rivin g
8
11
Airbag System Components
6
7
8
9
8
8
8 810
12
41Continued
42
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 42
The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
dAn electronic control unit that continually monitors and can record information about the sensors, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The drivers and front passengers seat belts incorporate sensors that detect whether or not they are fastened.
fA drivers seat position sensor. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force.
gWeight sensors in the front passengers seat. The front passengers airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child).
h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passengers front airbag has been turned off.
jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
kSafing Sensor
lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbag.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components Safe D
rivin g
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 43
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Important Facts About Your Airbags
43
44
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple- threshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 44
Types of Airbags Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Housing Locations
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D
rivin g
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 45
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Operation
How the Front Airbags Work
Continued 45
46
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 46
When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a rollover. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D
rivin g
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly: Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. Do not put any object under the passengers seat. Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.
Do not place any cover over the passenger side dashboard.
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 551
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 47
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag inflates with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system has weight sensors.
Although we recommend against carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of a child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn off the passenger's front airbag.
Advanced Airbags
Drivers Seat Position Sensor
Passengers Seat Weight Sensors
47
48
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 48
Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the drivers and passengers seat- backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to- severe side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.
Housing Locations
Housing Location
Operation
When inflated
Side Airbag
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Safe D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 49
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
49
50
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.
If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger seat.
To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 50
Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Housing Locations
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Safe D
rivin g
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 51
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.
Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display*.
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you dont, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
*
Continued 51* Not available on all models
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
52
Safe D rivin
g
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passengers seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors, such as:
An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.
A child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat-back.
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passengers seat.
The front seat or seat-back is forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
An object placed under the front passengers seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 52
When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the passengers front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the front passengers weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 2 Child Safety P. 54
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passengers front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S. Canada
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Safe D
rivin g
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 53
Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the drivers seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passengers seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
53
54
Safe D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 54
Child Safety
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.
3WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.
Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers Safe D
rivin g
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 67
3WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 55
Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
55
56
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe D rivin
g
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturers instructions before installation.
3WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 56
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 41
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Infants
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the childs height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 57
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward- facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Protecting Smaller Children
Continued 57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
58
Safe D rivin
g
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 58
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owners manual for proper installation instructions.
Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Selecting a Child Seat
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 59
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
59Continued
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
60
Safe D rivin
g
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 60
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 61
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer's instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 2 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
Continued 61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
62
Safe D rivin
g
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 62
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is available.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 63
A tether anchorage point is provided behind each rear seating position. A child seat that is installed with a seat belt and comes with a tether can use the tether for additional security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage point and lift the cover.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs.
2. Remove the head restraint. 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 165
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. u Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
5. Reinstall the head restraint. u Make sure to adjust the head restraint in
its highest position. 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 165
Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points
Cover
Anchor
Outer Position Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Center Position Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Rear outer seating positions
Rear center seating position
All positions
Rear center seating position
63
64
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe D rivin
g
1Safety of Larger Children
3WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 64
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.
Checklist Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat? Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm? Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs? Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safe D
rivin g
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 65
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seating position. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual. Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.
Booster Seats
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
65
66
Safe D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 66
Exhaust Gas Hazard
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.
3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. The exhaust system may have been damaged. The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open both windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 67
Safety Labels
Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
Safe D rivin
g
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models Canadian models
Radiator Cap
U.S. models only Dashboard
67
68
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 68
* Not available on all m
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 69
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
odels
Indicators ............................................ 70 Information Display Warning and Information Messages* .................... 88
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* .................... 90
Gauges and Displays Gauges.............................................. 98 Information Display*.......................... 99 Multi-Information Display*............... 102
69
70
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 70
Indicators
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off if the parking brake has been released.
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released.
Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 574
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 574
Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 71
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 572
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine did not start. If readiness codes have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engines cylinders is detected.
Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 589 Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 573
Charging System Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.
Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 572
71Continued* Not available on all models
72
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 72
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Shift Lever Position Indicator*
Indicates the current shift lever position.
2 Shifting P. 430, 434
Models with information display
Models with multi- information display
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 73
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift Indicator
Comes on when 7-speed manual shift mode is applied.
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 432
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
M (Sequential shift mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator
Comes on when manual sequential shift mode is applied.
2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 436
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
Models with information display
Models with multi- information display
Automatic transmission models
Models with information display
Models with multi- information display
73Continued* Not available on all models
74
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 74
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Transmission Indicator*
Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 35
Models with information display
Models with multi- information display
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 75
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Low Fuel Indicator
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.6 U.S. gal./9.7 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 481
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
75Continued* Not available on all models
76
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 76
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA is active. Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA system or hill start assist system.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 471
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) OFF Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA.
2 VSA OFF Button P. 472
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 77
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Door and Trunk Open Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if either door or the trunk is not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if either door or the trunk is opened while driving.
Goes off when both doors and the trunk are closed.
Parking Sensor System Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the parking sensor system.
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator stays on even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 574
Models with information display
Models with multi- information display
77Continued* Not available on all models
78
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 78
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
May come on briefly if the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when: - One or more tires pressures are
determined to be significantly low. - The system has not been calibrated.
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures - The system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.
Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 79
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
System Message Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the multi-information display appears at the same time.
While the indicator is on, press the
(information) button to see the message again.
Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the multi-information display. Take the appropriate action for the message.
The multi-information display does not return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the button is pressed.
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.
Blink along with all turn signals when you press the hazard warning button.
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 532, 531, 533
High Beam Indicator
Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.
Lights On Indicator
Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO when the exterior lights are on.
If you remove the key from the ignition switch*1 while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
79Continued* Not available on all models
80
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 80
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Fog Light Indicator*
Comes on when the fog lights are on.
Immobilizer System Indicator
Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1, pull the key out, and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w *1 again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Security System Alarm Indicator
Blinks when the security system alarm has been set. 2 Security System Alarm P. 133
Indicator
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 81
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
ECON Mode Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you press the ECON button.
2 ECON Button P. 441
CRUISE MAIN Indicator*
Comes on when you press the CRUISE button.
2 Cruise Control P. 442
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator*
Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control. 2 Cruise Control P. 442
Washer Level Indicator*
Comes on when the washer fluid gets low.
Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid
P. 528
Maintenance Minder Indicator*
Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505
81Continued* Not available on all models
82
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 82
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Smart Entry System Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you change the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the smart entry system or push button starting system.
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Starter System Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the starter system has a problem.
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Light Control Indicator*
Comes on if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system or low beam headlights*.
Comes on while driving - Turn the lights on manually and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 83
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Auto High-Beam Indicator (Green)*
Comes on when all the operating conditions of the auto high-beam are met.
2 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)* P. 148
Auto High-Beam Indicator (Amber)*
Comes on if there is a problem with the auto high-beam.
Manually operate the headlight switch. If you are driving with the high-beam
headlights when this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
Comes on when the area around the camera on the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
If the indicator does not go off after cleaning the lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
83Continued* Not available on all models
84
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 84
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the RDM system.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on when the RDM system shuts itself off.
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 85
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber)*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with ACC.
Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.
May come on when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
ACC has been automatically canceled.
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dear if the indicator does not go off even after you clean the sensor cover.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (White)*
Comes on when you press the MAIN button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447
Comes on if the temperature inside the camera is too high.
ACC has been automatically canceled.
Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.
Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing the MAIN button can resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447
85Continued* Not available on all models
86
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 86
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White)*
Comes on when you press the MAIN button. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
P. 464
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 87
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate the CMBSTM. A multi-information display message appears for five seconds.
Comes on if there is a problem with the CMBSTM.
Stays on constantly without the CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 483
Comes on when the CMBSTM system shuts itself off.
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 483
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
87* Not available on all models
88
uu Indicatorsu Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 88
Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed. 2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 573
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the battery.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
uu IndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 89
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after moving the shift lever to (P .
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Appears when the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.
Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.
Appears when the smart entry remotes battery becomes weak.
Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547
Models with smart entry system
Automatic transmission/CVT models
U.S. manual transmission models
Canadian models
89
90
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 90
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the (information) button to see the message again
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 573
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. u Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi- Information Display P. 510
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 570
Appears if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system.
Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Appears if there is a problem with the low beam headlights.
Appears while driving - The low beam headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
* Not available on all models
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 91
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if there is a problem with the auto high- beam.
Manually operate the headlight switch. If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
Appears when the area around the camera on the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
If the message does not disappear after cleaning the lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor system. The beeper sounds.
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.
Appears when the washer fluid is low. Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 528
Models with auto high-beam
Models with auto high-beam
Models with parking sensor system
Canadian models
91Continued
92
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 92
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the ignition key is turned to ACCESSORY (q from ON (w. (The drivers door is closed.)
Appears when you open the drivers door while the ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , then remove the key.
Appears when you open the drivers door while the ignition key is in LOCK (0 .
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 93
Message Condition Explanation
Appears after you unlock and open the drivers door.
2 Starting the Engine P. 423
Appears when the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .
Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Models with smart entry system
U.S. manual transmission models Canadian models
93Continued
94
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 94
Message Condition Explanation
Appears after the drivers door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 143
Appears when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak.
Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547
Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not within operating range to start the engine. A beeper sounds six times.
Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button to be touched with.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 564
Appears three seconds after the To Start Engine: Brake + Push message appears. 2 Changing the Power Mode P. 141
Appears three seconds after you bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button when To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button appears. To Start Engine: Brake + Push appears sequentially.
2 Changing the Power Mode P. 141
Models with smart entry system
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 95
Message Condition Explanation
Appears while you are customizing the settings and the shift lever is moved out of (P.
2 Customized Features P. 106
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the battery.
Appears when the battery is not charging.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Checking the Battery P. 546
Appears along with the battery charging system indicator - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 572
Appears when the starter system has a problem. As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Appears for about three seconds when ACC has been automatically canceled.
You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle in front of you.
Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
P. 483
95Continued* Not available on all models
96
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 96
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message appears again after you cleaned the area around the camera.
Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too high.
ACC/LKAS has been automatically canceled.
Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing
the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system. 2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 464
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 464
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected line.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line. 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* P. 460
You can change the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Warning Only
When you selected Normal or Wide
* Not available on all models
uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 97
Message Condition Explanation
Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper sounds simultaneously.
Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.
If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 70
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when you unlock and open the drivers door while the engine is running by smart entry remote. 2 Remote Engine Start* P. 425
Models with remote engine starter
97* Not available on all models
98
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 98
Gauges and Displays
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 570
Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel Gauge
Temperature Gauge
uuGauges and Displaysu Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Switching the Display
Each time you press the knob, the information display changes as follows:
Some of the items on the information display also appear on the audio/information screen. They also change along with the information display changes while the fuel consumption is shown.
Instant Fuel Economy, Odometer, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy, Range, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature
Engine Oil Life
Instant Fuel Economy, Average Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy, Average Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B, Outside Temperature
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 99
Information Display*
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.
Switching the Display
Select/Reset Knob
99Continued* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*
100
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 100
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505
Odometer
Trip Meter
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Engine Oil Life
uuGauges and Displaysu Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 101
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature indicator Adjust the temperature reading up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display. u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5F to +5F (U.S.) or -3C to +3C (Canada). 3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown. u The adjustment is complete.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Outside Temperature
Range
101
102
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
In stru
m en
t Pan el Elapsed Time Average Speed
hicle Settings Engine Oil Life
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 102
Multi-Information Display*
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
Main displays Press the (information) button to change the display.
Switching the Display
Average Fuel Economy/ Instant Fuel Economy Range
Blank Screen Ve Button
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 103
Lower displays Press the SEL/RESET button to change the display.
Odometer Trip A Trip B
SEL/RESET Button
103Continued
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
104
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 104
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Odometer
Trip Meter
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Elapsed Time
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 105
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.
Average Speed
Instant Fuel Economy
Engine Oil Life
Outside Temperature
Continued 105
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
106
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the button.
2 List of customizable options P. 109 2 Example of customization settings P. 113
Customization is possible when you see the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen. The drivers ID indicates which remote transmitter you have used to unlock the drivers door. The customized settings are recalled every time you unlock the drivers door with that remote.
When you customize settings: Shift to (P
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 106
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
How to customize Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Press the SEL/RESET button.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Customized Features
Button: Changes the customize menus and items.
Multi-Information Display: Goes to Vehicle Settings.
SEL/RESET button: Enters the selected item.
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 107
Customization flow Press the button.
SEL/RESETVehicle Settings
Trip A Reset Timing
Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Memory Position Link
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
4
4
4
4
TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup
Meter Setup
Position Setup
Keyless Access Setup
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
Trip B Reset Timing Fuel Efficiency Backlight
4
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
ACC Display Speed Unit
4 Keyless Start Guidance Screens
SEL/RESET
Keyless Access Beep
Forward Collision Warning Distance
4
4
4
Lane Keep Assist Suspend Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Remote Start System ON/OFF*
107Continued* Not available on all models
108
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 108
Exit
4
4
4
Door Setup
Maintenance Reset
Default All
SEL/RESET
4
SEL/RESET
4
Lighting Setup SEL/RESET
4
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
4
4
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 109
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
TPMS Calibration
Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate
Driver Assist System Setup
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit Changes the ACC display speed unit.
mph*1/km/h (U.S.) mph/km/h*1
(Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.
Normal*1/Wide/Warning Only
Lane Keep Assist Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.
On/Off*1
109Continued
110
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 110
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language. English*1/French/Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)
Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
Displays the push button start guidance when conditions are met to change power mode.
On*1/Off
Driving Position Setup
Memory Position Link Changes the drivers seat position to a stored setting.
On*1/Off
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 111
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Keyless Access Setup
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either door handle.
On*1/Off
Remote Start System ON/OFF* Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec*1/15sec
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.
60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min
111Continued* Not available on all models
112
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 112
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.
All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted To Park/All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the drivers door or both doors to unlock on the first operation of the remote or built- in key.
Driver Door*1/ All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening either door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Maintenance Reset
Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.
Cancel/Reset
Default All Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default.
Cancel/Set
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In
stru m
en t Pan
el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 113
Example of customization settings The steps for changing the Trip A Reset Timing setting to With Refuel are shown below. The default setting for Trip A Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button.
2. Press the button until Meter Setup appears on the display.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button. u Language Selection appears first in the
display.
113Continued
114
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
In stru
m en
t Pan el
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 114
4. Press the button until Trip A Reset Timing appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you can select With Refuel, IGN Off, Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Press the button and select With Refuel, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The With Refuel Setup screen appears,
then the display returns to the customization menu screen.
6. Press the button until Exit appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.
* Not available on all m
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 115
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 116 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 118 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*... 120 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 121
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 126
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 128 Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 129 Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 133 Security System Alarm...................... 133
Opening and Closing the Windows ...136 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* ...139
odels
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel Ignition Switch*............................... 140 ENGINE START/STOP Button*........... 141 Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison ................................... 144
Turn Signals ..................................... 145 Light Switches.................................. 145 Fog Lights* ...................................... 147 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)* ........................................ 148
Daytime Running Lights ................... 151 Wipers and Washers ........................ 152 Brightness Control ........................... 154
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ........................................... 155
Driving Position Memory System* .... 156 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 158
Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 159 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 160
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 161 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items ................................................ 169
Climate Control System Using Automatic Climate Control .... 180 Synchronized Mode ......................... 182 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 183
115
116
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 116
Clock
1Adjusting the Clock
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
You can turn the clock display on and off. 2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
Models with one display
1Using the SETTINGS button
To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then press the (6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets forward or backward. Example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:53 will reset to 2:00
Adjusting the Clock You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
then Clock Adjustment. 3. Rotate to change hour, then press . 4. Rotate to change minute, then press .
Using the SETTINGS button 1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)
button until the clock display blinks. 2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
adjust the time. 3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the
time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Adjusting the Time Models with one display
Models with one display
CLOCK (SETTINGS) Button
(6 (Reset) Button
(4 (Hour) Button
(5 (Minute) Button
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen
The clock is automatically updated through the audio system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Models with two displays
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 117
Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen 1. Select , then select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock
Adjustment. 3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
/ . 4. Select OK to set the time.
Models with two displays
3 4
117
118
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 118
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 133
The keys contain precision electronics. Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics: Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids. Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote.
2 Remote Engine Start* P. 425
Models with remote engine starter
Key Types and Functions This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the key to start and stop the engine, to lock and unlock the doors and to open the trunk. You can also use the remote transmitter or smart entry system* to lock and unlock the doors and to open the trunk.
Smart entry remote*
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built- in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks.
Master Keys
Master Key* Smart Entry Remote*
Smart Entry Remote with Remote Engine Starter*
Built-in Key
Release Knob
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions C
o n
tro ls
1Valet Key*
When you need to leave a key with a third party, leave the valet key.
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 119
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and lock and unlock driver's door.
Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.
Valet Key*
Gray
Key Number Tag
119* Not available on all models
120
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
C o
n tro
ls
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remotes battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 120
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip either door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle after two seconds of locking it.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 121
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk. You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk release button.
Locking the doors and the trunk Press the door lock button on either door. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; both doors and the trunk lock; and the security system sets.
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
Door Lock Button
121Continued* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
122
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be customized using the multi-information display*, audio/information screen* or audio/information touch screen*.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 122
Unlocking the vehicle Grab the drivers door handle: u The drivers door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice. Grab the passengers door handle: u Both doors and the trunk unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button: u The trunk unlocks and opens. 2 Using the Trunk Release Button* P. 130
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you press the unlock button. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 169
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
The remote transmitter will not work when the key is in the ignition switch.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter or smart entry system only when the power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 123
Locking the doors Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, both doors
lock, and the security system sets. Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
Using the Remote Transmitter
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
Continued 123
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
124
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 124
Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the drivers door unlocks.
Twice: u The passengers door unlocks.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the drivers door with a key, the passengers door locks at the same time. When unlocking, the drivers door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the passengers door.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the drivers door, the passengers door locks at the same time. Make sure you have the key in your hand before locking the door to prevent it from being locked in the vehicle.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 125
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Locking the drivers door Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door. u The doors cannot be locked when the key
is in the ignition switch*1, or the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
Locking the passengers door Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Lock
Unlock
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
125
126
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, the passengers door locks at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 126
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.
Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.
Using the Lock Tab
To Unlock
Lock TabTo Lock
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside C
o n
tro ls
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle
The inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull an inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 127
Pull the inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks both doors.
To avoid both doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the drivers door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want both doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the multi-information display*, audio/information screen* or audio/information touch screen*.
Unlocking Using the Inner Handle
Inner Handle
Continued 127* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
128
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the drivers door using the master lock switch, the passengers door locks/ unlocks at the same time.
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information display*, audio/information screen* or audio/ information touch screen*.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 128
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock both doors.
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks and unlocks both doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
Drive lock mode Both doors lock when the vehicles speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Drivers door open mode Both doors unlock when the drivers door is opened.
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
To Unlock
Master Door Lock Switch
To Lock
Auto Door Locking
Auto Door Unlocking
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 129
Opening and Closing the Trunk
o n
tro ls
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk Opening the trunk Open the trunk all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
Closing the trunk Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. 2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66
Using the Trunk Opener Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk Release
129Continued
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button*
130
C o
n tro
ls
1Locking the trunk opener
If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.
Models without smart entry system
1Using the Trunk Release Button*
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
A person who is not carrying the smart entry remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is within range.
Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the trunk cannot be closed.
Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk lid when closing it.
Do not place the smart entry remote around the rear seat when closing the trunk.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 130
Locking the trunk opener You can lock the trunk release with the master key* or the built-in key*.
Using the Trunk Release Button*
Press the release button on the trunk lid after the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk if you carry the smart entry remote. u The beeper will sound.
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter C
o n
tro ls
1Trunk Main Switch*
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote by sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a valet key.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 131
Using the Remote Transmitter Press the trunk release button for approximately one second to unlock and open the trunk.
Trunk Main Switch*
The trunk main switch disables the trunk release button on the remote transmitter and the trunk release button on the trunk lid to protect luggage in the trunk. 1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down. 2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box. 3. Lock the glove box. 4. Lock the trunk release.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 129
Trunk Button
ON
OFF
Main Switch
131* Not available on all models
132
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
C o
n tro
ls
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 132
Emergency Trunk Opener The trunk release lever allows you to open the trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow.
Lever
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 133
Security System
o n
tro ls
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system deactivates.
Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button. Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. Do not bring a key from another vehicles immobilizer system near the ignition
switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button. Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as a television set
and audio system are strongly magnetic, or a key chain can become magnetic, too.
Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system.
However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, then the shift lever is moved out of (P (automatic transmission/CVT models) or the hood is opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.
To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
133Continued
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
134
C o
n tro
ls
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: Unlocking the door with the lock tab. Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener. Opening the hood with the hood release.
Moving the shift lever out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another device to it.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 134
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch. The hood and trunk are closed. Both doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart
entry system.
When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter, smart entry system or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. The security system indicator goes off at the same time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm C
o n
tro ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 135
The panic button on the remote transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: The horn sounds. Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Panic Mode
Panic Button
135
136
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 136
Opening and Closing the Windows
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Opening either door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3WARNING Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open and close both windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the passengers window from the passenger's side.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
On Off
Power Window Lock Button
IndicatorDrivers Window Switch
Passengers Window Switch
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows C
o n
tro ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 137
To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button twice within 10 seconds and hold it down for the second time.
If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function*
Close
Open
Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote*
Unlock Button
137Continued* Not available on all models
138
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 138
To open: Unlock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. To close: Lock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key*
Close
Open
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 139
Opening and Closing the Moonroof*
o n
tro ls
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off. Opening either door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.
3WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
Open
Close Tilt
139* Not available on all models
140
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 140
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
1Ignition Switch*
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P.
If you open the drivers door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out.
When this happens, the following messages appear on the multi-information display: In LOCK (0: Remove Key From Ignition In ACCESSORY (q: Turn Ignition Switch To Lock
(0) Position
If the key wont turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn.
3WARNING Removing the key from the ignition switch while driving locks the steering. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch only when parked.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
All models
Models with multi-information display
All models
Ignition Switch*
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key.
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button* C
o n
tro ls
1ENGINE START/STOP Button*
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode: Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, the beeper sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi-information display*.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 564
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.
Operating Range
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 141
ENGINE START/STOP Button*
*1: Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
Changing the Power Mode
Automatic Transmission/CVT Manual Transmission VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Indicator in the button is off. The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all electrical components is turned off.
Press the button without the shift lever in (P.
Shift to (P then press the button.
Press the button.
Without pressing the clutch pedal
Without pressing the brake pedal
ACCESSORY Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the button blinks (from ON to ACCESSORY). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
ON Indicator in the button is on. All electrical components can be used.
Indicator Indicator
Shift to (P. U.S. models
141Continued* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
142
C o
n tro
ls
1Changing the Power Mode
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.
Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 142
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the drivers door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds.
*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models
Automatic Power Off
Power Mode Reminder
Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button* C
o n
tro ls
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the systems operational range, and the drivers door is closed, the warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the systems operational range.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 143
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ or outside the vehicle to remind you that the smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it within the systems operational range.
When the power mode is in ON If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the drivers door is closed, warning buzzers sound from both inside and outside the vehicle. A warning message on the information display or multi-information display notifies the driver inside that the remote is out.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and both doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.
Smart Entry Remote Reminder
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
143
144
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 144
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
*1:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
Ignition Switch Position
LOCK (0) (with/without the key)
ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) START (III)
Without Smart Entry System
Engine is turned off and power is shut down.
The steering wheel is locked.
No electrical components can be used.
Engine is turned off. Some electrical
components such as the audio system and the accessory power socket can be operated.
Normal key position while driving.
All electrical components can be used.
Use this position to start the engine.
The ignition switch returns to the ON (II) position when you release the key.
Power Mode VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
ACCESSORY ON START
With Smart Entry System and ENGINE START/STOP Button
Indicator-Off Engine is turned off and
power is shut down. The steering wheel is
locked*1. No electrical
components can be used.
Indicator-On or blinking Engine is turned off. Some electrical
components such as the audio system and the accessory power socket can be operated.
Indicator- On (engine is turned off) Off (engine is running) All electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-Off The mode automatically
returns to ON after the engine starts.
Indicator is: On Off
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals C
o n
tro ls
1Light Switches
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 79
If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 145
Turn Signals The turn signals can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. One-touch turn signal When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the position of the ignition switch*1. High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Right Turn
Left Turn
Manual Operation
High Beams
Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
145Continued
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
146
C o
n tro
ls
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
Light Sensor
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 146
Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights* C
o n
tro ls
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at
MAX HIGH MID LOW MIN
Bright
Dark
1Headlight Integration with Wipers*
This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.
1Fog Lights*
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on. They go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator* P. 80
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 147
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the drivers door. u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the drivers door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Fog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Headlight Integration with Wipers*
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Fog Light Switch
147* Not available on all models
148
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*
C o
n tro
ls
1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*
The auto high-beam determines when to change the headlight beams by responding to the brightness of the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the following cases, however, the system may not respond to the lights properly: The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor. Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.). Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric
billboards are illuminating the road ahead. The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes. The road is bumpy or has many curves. A vehicle ahead of you suddenly cuts you off or is
not traveling in the appropriate deirection. Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 148
Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*
Uses the camera attached, monitors the space ahead of your vehicle, and automatically changes the low beam headlights to high beam headlights when necessary.
The headlight switch is in AUTO.
The lever is in the low beam position.
The system recognizes that you are driving at night and the low beam headlights come on.
The vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
The system operates when:
The camera is not detecting any lights coming from preceding or oncoming vehicles: The headlights change to high beams.
15-degree
The camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle: The headlights are returned to low beams.
The camera monitors the range within the 30-degree view angle. The distance that the camera can detect lights ahead differs depending on conditions, such as the brightness of the lights and the weather.
The system changes between high and low beam headlights when:
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)* C
o n
tro ls
1To Operate the System
For the auto high-beam to work properly: Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard. Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
Do not attach an object, sticker or film in the area around the camera.
Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on the camera.
If the Can Not Operate: message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place. Wipe away debris blocking the windshield, then start driving again. If the message remains on even after driving for a while with the clean windshield, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with multi-information display
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 149
Turn the headlight switch in AUTO and pull the headlight lever to low beam.
2 Light Switches P. 145
The auto high-beam indicator (Green) comes on.
Temporary cancellation The auto high-beam operation is temporarily canceled while: You are continuously driving at a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h). The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h). The windshield wipers run at high speed for more than a few seconds.
The system operation resumes once the condition that caused it to cancel improves.
To Operate the System
Headlight Switch
Continued 149
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*
150
C o
n tro
ls
1To Disable the System
The auto high-beam will remain in the selected disabled or enabled setting each time you start the engine.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 150
Disable the system when the vehicle is parked with the ignition switch in ON (w *1 and the light switch is in the AUTO position. To disable the system: Pull the light switch lever towards you and hold it for 40 seconds. The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will blink twice. To enable the system: Pull the light switch lever towards you and hold it for 30 seconds. The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will blink once.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
To Disable the System
AUTO Position
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights C
o n
tro ls
1Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights come on dimmer when the headlight switch is in than when it is in AUTO. In AUTO, if the ambient brightness is dark, the low beam headlights come on.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 151
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions have been met:
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:
The ignition switch is in ON (w *1. The headlight switch is off, or in . The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch is turned on.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models with bulb type parking lights
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with bulb type parking lights
151
152
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
C o
n tro
ls
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield, becoming stuck. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage them. Use the defroster to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a single sweep. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operations shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
All models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 152
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT*, LO, HI) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
AUTO*
2 Automatic Intermittent Wipers* P. 153
Adjusting wiper operation Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper delay.
Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
MIST
INT*: Low speed with intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to use washer.
AUTO*: Wiper speed varies automatically
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers C
o n
tro ls
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not put the wiper lever in AUTO when cleaning the windshield or driving through a car wash. If the wiper lever is in AUTO, and the power mode is in ON, the rainfall sensor may respond to your hand or car wash liquids, and the wipers may operate automatically.
Rainfall Sensor
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 153
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stops in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects.
AUTO sensitivity adjustment When in AUTO, you can also adjust the rainfall sensor sensitivity using the adjustment ring.
Sensor sensitivity
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
Adjustment Ring
Low Sensitivity: Wipers will operate when more rainfall is detected.
High Sensitivity: Wipers will operate when less rainfall is detected.
153* Not available on all models
154
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
C o
n tro
ls
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.
Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 154
Brightness Control When the parking lights are turned on and the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. The information display*/multi-information display* will return to its original state several seconds after you adjust the brightness.
Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the information display*/multi-information display* while you are adjusting it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Control Knob
On information display
On multi-information display
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button C
o n
tro ls
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 155
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32F (0C) or below, they do not automatically switch off.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
155* Not available on all models
156
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
C o
n tro
ls
1Driving Position Memory System*
Using the multi-information display*, audio/ information screen* or audio/information touch screen*, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
System Operation The system will not operate if: The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h). Either memory position button is pressed while the
seat is in motion. The seat position is adjusted while in operation. The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 156
Driving Position Memory System*
You can store two drivers seat positions with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the drivers door with a remote, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.
The multi-information display* shows you which remote you used to unlock the vehicle when you enter.
DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System* C
o n
tro ls
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: You do not press the memory button within five
seconds. You readjust the seat position before the double-
beep. You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you: Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or
(2). Adjust the seat position.
Shift into any position except (P.
Release the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 157
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the drivers seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button. u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink. 3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on.
1. Move the shift lever to (P .
2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the memorized position. When it has finished moving, you will hear a beep, and the indicator light stays on.
Storing a Position in Memory
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
SET Button
Recalling the Stored Position
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
Automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
157
158
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.
3WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 158
Adjusting the Steering Wheel The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators. 3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.
To adjust
To lockLever
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 159
Adjusting the Mirrors
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 161
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift position is in (R.
Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.
Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.
When driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you, based in inputs from the mirror sensor. This feature is always active.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Tab
Daytime Position
Night Position
Up
Down
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
Sensor
Up
Down
159* Not available on all models
160
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
C o
n tro
ls 1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 160
Power Door Mirrors You can adjust the door mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner segments. The outer segment is slightly curved to provide a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror. This wider view may help you check areas that are not visible using a standard door mirror.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Inner Segment
Outer Segment
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 161
Adjusting the Seats
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.
Adjusting the Seat Positions Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger's seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.
Adjusting the drivers power seat*
Move back.
Allow sufficient space.
Horizontal Position Adjustment
Height Adjustment
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
Lumbar Support Adjustment
161Continued* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
162
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 162
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.
Drivers seat is shown.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions C
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.
3WARNING Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 163
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
163
164
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
C o
n tro
ls
1Head Restraints
In order for the head restraint system to work properly: Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs. Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back. Install each restraint in its proper location.
3WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 164
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear- impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant's ears should be level with the center height of the restraint. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions
Position head in the center of the head restraint.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints C
o n
tro ls
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
To remove the rear outer head restraints, fold down the seat-back first.
2 Folding Down the Rear Seat P. 168
3WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 165
A passenger sitting in the center back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.
Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
165
166
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
C o
n tro
ls
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 166
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position C
o n
tro ls
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
When you enter the rear seat, be careful not to trip over the front seat belt. If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the seat-back forward.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 167
Pulling up the fold-down lever tilts the seat- back forward.
Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever tilts the seat-back forward.
Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever, or pushing down the front passenger seat-back release lever tilts the seat-back forward. You can also use these levers to move the seat forward.
Rear Seat Access
Fold-down Lever
Driver side
Models with drivers power seat
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Lever
Models with drivers manual seat
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Lever
Release Lever
Passenger side
167
168
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
C o
n tro
ls
1Folding Down the Rear Seat
The rear seat-back can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66
To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 52
Make sure all items in the trunk or items extending through the opening into the rear seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 168
Rear Seats
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the guide.
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release the lock.
3. Fold the seat-back down.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints P. 165
Folding Down the Rear Seat
Guide
Center Shoulder Belt
Release Lever
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 169
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
o n
tro ls
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations: When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
When you remove the key from the ignition switch but do not open a door.
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: When you lock the driver's door. When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
When you close the driver's door with the key in the ignition switch.
When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY mode.
If you leave either door open without the key in the ignition switch*1, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Interior Lights
ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: When either of the doors are opened. You unlock the driver's door.
You remove the key from the ignition switch.
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.
Interior Light Switches
Door Activated Position
Off
Door Activated Position
On
Off
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
169Continued
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Lights
170
C o
n tro
ls
1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated position and either door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 170
The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.
Map Lights
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Glove Box
3WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 171
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
You can lock the glove box with the master key or the built-in key.
Pull the handle to open the console compartment.
Glove Box
Glove Box
Handle
To Lock
Console Compartment
171Continued
172
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 172
Pull the handle to open the pocket.
Center Pocket
Handle
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 173
Front seat beverage holders
Door beverage holders
Rear seat beverage holders
Beverage Holders
Continued 173
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
174
C o
n tro
ls
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined power rating of the accessories should not exceed 180 watts (15 amps).
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 174
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.
Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the cover to use it.
Accessory power socket (console compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Accessory Power Sockets
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Wireless Charger*
This system consumes a lot of power, so do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the users manual that came with to the compatible device you want to charge.
3CAUTION Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you. Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the device.
Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.
Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.
Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.
Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.
Avoid using spraying hair spray, insecticides, etc, that may contact the charge pad surface.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 175
To use the wireless charger, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1. Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:
1. To turn the system on and off, press and hold the (power) button. u When the system is activated, the green
indicator light comes on. 2. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area. u The system will automatically start
charging the device, and the amber indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible with the system, and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.
3. When charging is completed, the green indicator light will come on. u Depending on the device, the amber
indicator light will stay on.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Wireless Charger*
Green Indicator
Amber Indicator
Charging Area (Power)
Button
Continued 175* Not available on all models
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
176
C o
n tro
ls
1Wireless Charger*
NOTICE Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision machines such as watches can go wrong.
Qi and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start: The device is already fully charged. The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging. You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic wave or noises such as TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when: Both doors or the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the smart entry system.
The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 176
When charging does not start Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Green &
Amber
Blinking simulta- neously
There is an obstacle(s) between the charging area and the device.
Remove the obstacle(s).
The device is not within the charging area.
Move the device to the center of the charging area where is located.
Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty. Contact a dealer for repairs.
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.
1Cargo Hooks
Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 177
There are coat hooks behind the center pillar on both sides. Pull them down to use them.
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to install a net for securing items.
Coat Hooks
Cargo Hooks
Continued 177
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
178
C o
n tro
ls
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 178
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.
Sunglasses Holder
Push
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off.
3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 179
The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the switch on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off. When a comfortable temperature is reached, select LO to keep the seat warm.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Seat Heaters*
179* Not available on all models
180
C o
n tro
ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 180
Climate Control System
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.
Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the drivers side or passengers side control
buttons. 3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicles interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Floor and defroster vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor vents
Dashboard vents
AUTO Button
Drivers Side Temperature Control Buttons
(Recirculation) Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passengers Side Temperature Control Buttons
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control C
o n
tro ls
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 181
Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.
To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the button. 2. Press the button.
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
181
182
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
C o
n tro
ls
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the button, the system changes to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side temperature and the passenger side temperature can be set separately.
The system adjusts each temperature based on the information of the sunlight sensor and the sun position updated by the navigation system.
Models with navigation system
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 182
Synchronized Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using drivers side temperature control buttons.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors C
o n
tro ls
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 183
Automatic Climate Control Sensors The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.Sensor
Sensor
183
184
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 184
* Not available on all m
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 185
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System About Your Audio System................ 186 USB Port(s*) ..................................... 187 Auxiliary Input Jack* ........................ 188 Audio System Theft Protection* ....... 189 Audio Remote Controls.................... 190
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 192 Audio/Information Screen ................ 193 Display Setup ................................... 198 Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 199 Playing a CD .................................... 201 Playing an iPod ................................ 204 Playing Internet Radio ...................... 207 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 210 Playing Bluetooth Audio................. 213
Models with one display
odels
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 215 Audio/Information Screen ................ 216 Audio/Information Touch Screen...... 218 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 232 Display Setup ................................... 233 Voice Control Operation .................. 235 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 239 Playing SiriusXM Radio* ................. 244 Playing a CD .................................... 252 Playing an iPod ................................ 255 Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 258 Playing Pandora*............................ 262 Playing AhaTM................................... 264 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 265 Playing Bluetooth Audio................. 268
Models with two displays
Audio Error Messages ...................... 286 General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 291
Customized Features ................ 298, 316 HomeLink Universal Transceiver* ... 340 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink..... 343, 374 Compass* .......................................... 409
185
186
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 186
Audio System
1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM Radio, contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System P. 291
SiriusXM Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM is a trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM Radio service*. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.
Remote Controls
iPod
USB Flash Drive
Models with one display
Remote Controls
iPod
USB Flash Drive
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s*) Featu
res
1USB Port(s*)
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturers instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 187
USB Port(s*) 1. Open the cover. 2. Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
In Center Pocket
In Console Compartment*
187* Not available on all models
188
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack*
Featu res
1Auxiliary Input Jack*
You can return to AUX mode by pressing the AUX button.
Replacement of the audio system with other than a genuine Honda system may make the auxiliary jack inoperable.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 188
Auxiliary Input Jack*
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. 1. Open the AUX cover. 2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection* Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 189
Audio System Theft Protection*
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display Enter code. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
Reactivating the audio system 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
189* Not available on all models
190
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Featu res
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some functions may not be operated.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 190
Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FMAMCDUSBiPod Bluetooth AudioPandora*AUX
FMAMSiriusXM*CDUSBiPod Pandora*Bluetooth AudioAudio Apps
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons Press (+ : To increase the volume. Press (- : To decrease the volume.
Buttons When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
When listening to a CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), USB flash drive, or Bluetooth Audio Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
Button
SOURCE Button
Button
(+ Button
(- Button
MENU Button*
Models with one display
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Featu
res
1Audio Remote Controls
The MENU button is available only when the audio mode is FM, AM, SiriusXM*, CD, USB, iPod, Pandora*, or Bluetooth Audio.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 191
Steering Wheel MENU Button To choose options for the current audio device, press MENU, Audio Menu, and then SOURCE. Options available to you for each audio device: Radio: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Save Preset, Seek Up, or Seek
Down. HD RadioTM*: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Tag Song, Save Preset, Seek
Up, or Seek Down. SiriusXM*: You can select Scan, Tag Song, Save Preset, Channel Up,
Channel Down, Category Up, or Category Down. CD or USB flash drive: You can select Scan Folders, Scan Tracks, Repeat
Folder, Repeat Track, Random in Folder, or Random All Tracks. iPod: You can select Play/Pause, Repeat Song, Shuffle Albums, or Shuffle All
Songs. Bluetooth Audio: You can select Pause or Play. Pandora*: You can select Like, Dislike, Bookmark, or Play/Pause.
To choose options for the navigation system while it is in operation, press MENU, select Navi Menu, and then SOURCE.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
To choose options for HFL, press MENU, select Phone Menu, and then SOURCE. You can select Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial.
To choose options for the display setting, press MENU, select Display Setting, and then SOURCE. You can select Brightness, Contrast, or Black Level.
Models with two displays
191* Not available on all models
192
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 192
Audio System Basic Operation
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 200 2 Radio text P. 200 2 Music Search P. 202, 205, 211 2 Scan P. 200, 203, 212 2 Random/Repeat P. 203, 206, 212
This product includes software codes licensed under the conditions stated by the copyright holder. For license conditions and the copy of the corresponding source code, visit: http:// www.hondaopensource1.com/002
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU button: Press to select any mode. The available mode includes Change Source, Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes. Play modes can be also selected from Scan, Random/ Repeat, and so on. BACK button: Press to go back to the previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/ information screen brightness. Press once and make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and OFF mode.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models with one display
Button Selector Knob
MENU ButtonBACK Button
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
udio Trip Computer (Current Drive)
lock/Wallpaper Trip Computer (History of Trip A)
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 193
Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
Switching the Display
(Display) Button A
C
Audio/Information Screen
193Continued
194
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 194
Audio Shows the current audio information.
Trip computer (Current Drive) Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
Trip computer (History of Trip A) Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles. Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
1Wallpaper Setup
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 195
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
2. Press the SETTINGS button. 3. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
4. Rotate to select Add New Wallpaper, then press . u The preview of the imported data is
displayed. 5. Rotate to select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen. 6. Press to save the data. u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the wallpaper list.
Wallpaper Setup
Continued 195* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
196
Featu res
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 196
Select wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Set, then press .
Delete wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Featu
res
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 197
Adjusting the Sound 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .
Rotate to scroll through the following choices:
Selector Knob
SETTINGS Button
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SVC
197
198
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Featu res
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 198
Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press .
4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press .
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate to select Background Color, then press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .
Changing the Screen Brightness
Changing the Screens Color Theme
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
resSeek/Skip Buttons Press and to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 199
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
FM/AM Button Press to select a band.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: Tune to the selected station. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
199Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
200
Featu res
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190 You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU button and selecting Change Source on the MENU screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 200
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .
Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press to select Stop, or press the BACK button.
Radio Data System (RDS)
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/folders. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 201
Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
CD Button Press to play a CD.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
201Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
202
Featu res
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 202
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a folder. 4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder. 5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/AAC)
File Selection
Folder Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 203
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
203
204
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Featu res
Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 204
Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button Press to select iPod (if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
Album Art
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 205
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a menu. 4. Press to display the items on that menu. 5. Rotate to select an item, then press .
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Continued 205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
206
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Song: Repeats the current file. Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 206
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
How to Select a Play Mode
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio Featu
res
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Please visit http://www.pandora.com/legal for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora is free personalized radio that offers effortless and endless music and comedy. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, genres, composers, or comedians and it will do the rest.
If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio. Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.
Changing Stations To change stations, activate the Pandora menu, select Station List, and then select a new station.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 207
Playing Internet Radio Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth.
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
iPhone
Continued 207
208
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 208
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button Press to select Pandora.
Skip Button Press to skip a song.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to switch to another station.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
USB Indicator Appears when a phone is connected.
Rating Icon
Preset Button (1) Press to switch the mode between pause and resume.
Preset Button (2) Press to select Dislike.
Preset Button (3) Press to select Like.
Preset Button (4) Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (5) Press to select Bookmark Artist.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio Featu
res
1Pandora Menu
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora P. 288
Pandora may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 209
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are: Like (Thumbs-up) Dislike (Thumbs-down) Station List Change Source Bookmark Track Bookmark Artist Play/Pause
Operating a menu item 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select an item, then press .
Pandora Menu
209
210
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Featu res
Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to change folders. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 210
Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 291
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 211
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a folder. 4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder. 5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
File Selection
Folder Selection
Continued 211
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
212
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 212
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu
res
1Playing Bluetooth Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 213
Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
AUX Button Press to select Bluetooth Audio.
Skip Buttons Press or to change files.
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/ Information Screen
Preset Button (1) Press to resume playing a file.
Preset Button (2) Press to pause a playing file.
213Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio
214
Featu res
1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack, you may need to press the AUX button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 214
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 215
Audio System Basic Operation
res
1Audio System Basic Operation
Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 240, 242 2 Music Search P. 253, 256, 266, 269 2 Scan P. 241, 251, 254, 267 2 Play Mode P. 254, 257, 267
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.
: Select to go to the home screen. 2 Switching the Display P. 218
: Select to display any mode. The available modes include Sound, View Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.
: Select to go back to the previous display when it is displayed.
Button: Press to change the audio/ information touch screen brightness. Press once and select (- or (+ to make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode
switches among the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models with two displays
Button (HOME) Icon
(MENU) Icon (BACK) Icon
215
216
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Featu res
Audio
Clock
Wallpaper
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 216
Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status, trip computer, compass*, Turn by Turn, and clock/ wallpaper.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
Switching the Display
(Display) Button
Compass*/Trip Computer/Audio
Turn by Turn/Trip Computer/Audio
Audio/Information Screen
Trip Computer/ Audio
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 217
Turn by Turn Displays the Turn by Turn screen.
Trip computer Displays the range and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
Audio Displays the current audio information.
Clock/Wallpaper Displays a clock screen.
217
218
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 218
Audio/Information Touch Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.
Select to go to the home screen. Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Aha, Smartphone connection, or App List.
Phone Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 374
Switching the Display
Home Screen
Models without navigation system
Models with navigation system
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 219
Info Displays Trip Computer. To see all available information, Trip Computer, Voice Info, or System/Device Information, select on the Info Menu screen.
Trip Computer: Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A. To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.
Voice Info: Displays the all commands list.
System/Device Information: System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system. USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.
Audio Displays the current audio information.
Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 316
Navigation*
Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
219Continued* Not available on all models
220
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 220
HondaLink Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and social media streams.
2 HondaLink P. 270
Aha Displays the AhaTM screen.
2 Playing AhaTM P. 264
Smartphone connection Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 277 2 Android Auto P. 281
App List Adds or removes App or Widget on the home screen.
2 Home Screen P. 224
*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for U.S. and www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 221
1. Select . 2. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization
screen. 3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be. 4. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
221Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
222
Featu res
1Wallpaper Setup
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 256 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 5 MB. The maximum image size is 4,096 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 222
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information touch screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open
the Wallpaper tab. 5. Select Add New. u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen. 7. Select Start Import to save the data. u The display will return to the wallpaper
list.
Wallpaper Setup
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu
res
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or select .
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes.
Audio/information touch screen
Audio/information screen
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 223
Select wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
To view wallpaper once it is set Press the (display) button to change the audio/information screen until the wallpaper is displayed.
2 Switching the Display P. 216
Delete wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete. u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes to delete completely. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
Continued 223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
224
Featu res
1Home Screen
The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 224
To change to a next screen
Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
Home Screen
Swipe
Icon Icon Current page position
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu
res
1To use apps or widgets
Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that apps or widgets shortcut on the home screen.
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser startup.
You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Detail Information. 6. Select an App that you want to delete. 7. Select Delete.
Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 225
To use apps or widgets 1. Select . 2. Select . 3. Select App List. u The APPS screen appears.
4. Select the app or widget you want to use.
Preinstall app list: Browser: Displays the web browser utilized
by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection. Calculator: Displays Calculator. Downloads: Displays the data downloaded
from the web browser and so on. Install USB: Installs and updates apps
stored in the USB flash drive. Search: Displays various retrieval screens. Settings: Displays the Android setting
screen. App List
Continued 225
226
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 226
To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select . 2. Select . 3. Select and hold empty space on the home
screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Add App or Add Widget. u The APPS screen appears.
Select and hold.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 227
5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you want to add. u The screen switches to the customization
screen. 6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be. 7. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
227Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
228
Featu res
1To move icons on the home screen
You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, aha, Smartphone connection, and App LIst icons in the same manner.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 228
To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization
screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be. 3. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu
res
1To remove icons on the home screen
You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, aha, Smartphone connection, and App List icons.
Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 229
To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization
screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the trash icon. u The icon is removed from the home
screen. 3. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop to trash icon.
Continued 229* Not available on all models
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 230
1. Swipe the upper area of the screen. u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Select or swipe up the icon to close
the area.
Status Area
Swipe
Status Area Icon
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu
res
1Closing Apps
If you leave the apps used open in the background, some apps may stop operating properly next time using them. If this happens close unused apps.
To close all apps on the system, select Stop All, then Yes.
You cannot close the HondaLink, AhaTM and Garmin* apps.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 231
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system. 1. Select and hold . 2. Select an app you want to close. 3. Select Stop. u The display will return to the app list.
Closing Apps
231* Not available on all models
232
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Featu res
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select Sound.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 232
Adjusting the Sound 1. Select . 2. Select Audio. 3. Select . 4. Select Sound.
Select a tab from the following choices: BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, Subwoofer*, Speed Volume Compensation (SVC).
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Featu
res
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 233
Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information touch screen.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Display Settings. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Background Color. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK.
Changing the Screen Brightness
Changing the Screens Color Theme
233Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
234
Featu res
1Selecting an Audio Source
If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is displayed on the upper portion of the screen. These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the source select screen. You can startup those audio apps from .
When you are using the AhaTM screen and you want to select another source, select SOURCE on the upper left of the screen. The source select screen will appear. Select the source you want.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 234
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Selecting an Audio Source
Limitations for Manual Operation
Select the source icon. Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the drivers seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passengers side.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 235
Voice Control Operation Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using. Close the windows and moonroof*. Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling. Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words. Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
Voice Recognition
235Continued* Not available on all models
236
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 236
When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say Voice Help after the beep or select Voice Help.
You can also see the list of commands by selecting Info, , and Voice Info.
*1: Models with navigation system
Voice Portal Screen
* Not available on all models
Phone Call This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change to the voice recognition screen for the phone commands. Dial by number Call history Redial Call
Music Search*1
This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected.
Audio*1
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change to the audio voice recognition screen. Audio On Audio Off Radio FM Radio AM Radio SXM DISC Pandora*
iPod USB Other Sources Pandora* cannot be used with Android Auto.
Navigation*1
The screen changes to the navigation voice recognition screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Voice Settings The screen changes to the Voice Recog tab on the System settings screen.
Trip Computer The screen changes to the trip computer screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 237
Voice Help You can see a list of the available commands on the screen. Useful Commands Phone Commands Audio Commands On Screen Commands Music Search Commands General Commands Climate Control Commands All Commands Voice Settings Getting Started
The system accepts these commands on the voice portal top screen. Call
*1: Models with navigation system
Useful Commands
* Not available on all models
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. Call by Number Call by Name Call
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.
Radio FM Commands Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM Radio FM preset <1-12>
Radio AM Commands Radio tune to <530-1710> AM Radio AM preset <1-6>
Radio SXM Commands SXM channel <1-999> SXM channel
Phone Commands
Audio Commands*1
Radio SXM preset <1-12>
DISC Commands DISC play DISC play track <1-30>
Pandora Commands*
Pandora play
iPod Commands iPod play iPod play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to?
USB Commands USB play USB play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to?
Bluetooth audio Commands Bluetooth audio play NOTE: Bluetooth Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth Audio devices.
237Continued
238
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 238
When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed.
The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen.
Using Song By Voice Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must push the talk switch and say: Music search.
Song By Voice Commands What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? Whats playing? Whos playing? What album is this?
*1: Models with navigation system
On Screen Commands
Music Search Commands*1
Play Commands Play artist
List Commands List artist
What time is it? What is todays date?
General Commands
Climate Control on Climate Control off Fan Speed <1-7> Temperature max heat Temperature max cool Temperature <57-87> degrees Defrost on Defrost off Air conditioner on Air conditioner off More Climate control automatic Vent Dash and floor Fan speed up Fan speed down Floor vents Floor and defrost Temperature up Temperature down
Climate Control Commands*1
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
res
Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.
TAG Icon Select to tag the song if it is played on an HD RadioTM station. The iPod/ iPhone should be connected to the audio system to store the tagged song information on your device.
Models with HD RadioTM
Audio/Information Touch Screen
et Icons e the radio frequency for preset memory. ct and hold the preset icon to store that ion. Select to display preset 7 onwards.
Audio/Information Screen
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 239
Playing AM/FM Radio
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.
Tune Icons Select or to tune the radio frequency.
Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal.
Pres Tun Sele stat
239Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
240
Featu res
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory.
If the audio system has the memory capacity, the tagged song information can be stored in it.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Models with HD RadioTM
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 240
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh.
Preset Memory
Station List
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 241
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or .
If your iPod/iPhone is connected to the USB port, you can store the TAG information. If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in the audio system temporarily, then once the device is connected to the system, data is transferred to the iPod/iPhone. To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone or the audio system, select TAG.
Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system. 1. Select . 2. Select Song Tag List.
Scan
Tag Song to Device
Tagged Song List
Models with HD RadioTM
Models with HD RadioTM
241Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
242
Featu res
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 242
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select . 2. Select HD Radio Subchannel. 3. Select the channel number.
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh.
HD Subchannel
Radio Data System (RDS)
Models with HD RadioTM
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 243
Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Select . 2. Select View Radio Text.
Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, select Cancel or .
243
244
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
Featu res
Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.
TAG Icon Select to tag a song played at a SiriusXM Radio channel. The iPod/ iPhone should be connected to the audio system to store the tagged song information on your device.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 7 onwards.
change . ve rapidly
Audio/Information Screen
Station Art
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 244
Playing SiriusXM Radio*
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.
Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM Radio category.
Scan Icon Select to scan each channel.
Skip Icons Select or to section in the channel Select and hold to mo within the section.
Album Art
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
1Playing SiriusXM Radio*
In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
SiriusXM Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190
Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off from the Audio settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 245
1. Select . 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
To Change the Tune Mode
Continued 245* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
246
Featu res
1Playing SiriusXM Radio*
You can store 12 SiriusXM channels into the preset memory.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 246
To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select to hold the preset number for the station you want to store. 3. Select Replace.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel. u A message appears if there are no
available presets. 5. Select Combine.
Preset Memory
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM can be displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 247
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM can be displayed and selected. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list. 2. Select the Channel List tab. 3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
4. Select the channel.
Listening to Featured Channels
Continued 247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
248
Featu res
1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1. You can go back to the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0 *1 as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information touch screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
(C)
(B)
(A)
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 248
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. 1. Select . 2. Select Playback Position. 3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay.
To play or pause on playback mode: 1. Select . 2. Select Play/Pause.
Returning to real-time broadcast 1. Select . 2. Select Play Live Broadcast.
Replay Function
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
1Live Sports Alert
The sports alert function at SiriusXM mode only.
1To set up a favorite team
Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM mode is on. Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2 Customized Features P. 316
You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 249
While listening to SiriusXM Radio, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.
To set up a favorite team 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup (Favorite Team). 6. Select a team.
To set up an alert message 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt). 6. Select On(one time) or On(continue).
Live Sports Alert
Continued 249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
250
Featu res
1To set up an alert beep
You can also set up an alert beep by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab.
1Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM mode only.
You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 250
To set up an alert beep 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep). 6. Select On.
Traffic and Weather Information You can receive traffic and weather information. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 6. Select the region. u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unset.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
1Scan
The Scan Songs in Presets function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM.
The Featured Channels function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM.
TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 251
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select Scan. 2. Select Scan Channels. u To only scan preset stations, select Scan Songs in Presets.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
If your iPhone/iPod is connected to the USB port, you can store the TAG information. If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in the audio system temporarily. Once the device is connected to the system, data is transferred to the iPod/iPhone. To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone, or the audio system, select TAG.
Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system. 1. Select . 2. Select Tagged Song List.
Scan
Tag Song to Device
Tagged Song List
251
252
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Featu res
Track Icons Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed information.
(Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 252
Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.
Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 253
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a track.
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/ AAC)
Folder Selection
Track Selection
Continued 253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
254
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 254
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. Scan 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a play mode.
Random/Repeat Select a play mode.
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
Song Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 255
Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.
Cover Art
Play/Pause Icon
255Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
256
Featu res
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information touch screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information touch screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source is unavailable and audio files on the phone can only be played within Apple CarPlay.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 256
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select the items on that menu.
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Category Selection
Item Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 257
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Select a play mode.
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
257
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Featu res
1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options: On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands
are available. Off: Disable the feature.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 258
Song By VoiceTM (SBV) Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands.
To enable SBV 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice. 6. Select On or Off.
Models with navigation system
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Featu
res
1Searching for music using SBV
Song By VoiceTM Commands List 2 Song By Voice Commands P. 238
NOTE: Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 260
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlay. Use Siri Eyes Free instead.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 259
Searching for music using SBV 1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On. 2. Press the (Talk) button and say Music
Search to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod.
3. Press the button and say a command. u Example 1: Say (List) Artist A to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say Play Artist A to start playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say Music Search again to re-activate this mode.
Continued 259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
260
Featu res
1Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 260
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select New Modification. 7. Select USB or iPod.
Phonetic Modification
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 261
8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen. 9. Select an entry to modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. u The listen to the current phonetic
modification, select Play. u To delete the current phonetic
modification, select Delete. 10.Select Modify. 11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to
use (e.g., Artist A) when prompted. 12.Select OK. u The artist No Name is phonetically
modified to Artist A. When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command Play Artist A to play songs by the artist No Name.
261
262
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora*
Featu res
1Playing Pandora*
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy youll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or composers and Pandora will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio. Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.
If your phone is connected to Android Auto, Pandora is only available through the Android Auto interface. Visit the Android Auto website to check compatibility.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 262
Playing Pandora*
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora app on a compatible smartphone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 383 2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
U.S. models
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Cover Art
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.
Play/Pause Icon Select to resume or play a song.
Station Up/Down Icons Select to change a station.
Skip Icon Select to skip a song.
Like/Dislike Icons Select to evaluate a song.
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora* Featu
res
1Pandora Menu
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information touch screen.
2 Pandora P. 288
Pandora may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.
To change stations, activate the Pandora menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 263
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are: Bookmark Station List New Station Sound Setting
Operating a menu item 1. Select . 2. Select an item.
Pandora Menu
263
264
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AhaTM
Featu res
1Playing AhaTM
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that organizes your favorite web content into live radio stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio, location-based services, and audio updates from social media sites.
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
The menu items vary depending on the station you selected.
You must have a previously set up AhaTM account prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit www.aharadio.com for more information.
You want to select another source, select AUDIO on the upper left of the screen. The source select screen will appear. Select the source you want.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, AhaTM can only be accessed when the phone is connected through Wi-Fi.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 264
Playing AhaTM
AhaTM can be displayed and operated on the audio/information touch screen when your smartphone is connected to the audio system by Wi-Fi or through Bluetooth with the HondaLink app downloaded to your smartphone.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 275 2 HondaLink P. 270
Audio/Information Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Audio/Information Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed information.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 265
Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.
Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
265Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
266
Featu res
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 291
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information touch screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
Select Switch USB Device in the Audio menu screen to switch to another USB device.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 266
1. Select and select Music Search. 2. Select Music.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a track.
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Folder Selection
Track Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
Random/Repeat Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order. Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 267
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. Scan 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a play mode.
Random/Repeat Select a play mode.
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
267
268
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio
Featu res
1Playing Bluetooth Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible. To check if your phone is compatible, visit http://www.handsfreelink.com/Honda/.
It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.
The connected phone for Bluetooth Audio can be different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth Audio by selecting Connect from Bluetooth Device List.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 268
Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
*1:Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.
Group Icons Select or to change group.Pause Icon
Play Icon
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Track Icons Select or to change tracks.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.
Audio/Information Screen
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.
(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu
res
1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth settings on the Audio menu screen by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings.
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 269
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
2. Select the Bluetooth Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file Select the play icon or pause icon.
1. Select . 2. Select Music Search. 3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 4. Select an item. u The selection begins playing.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Searching for Music
269
270
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink
Featu res
1HondaLink
The HondaLink connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HondaLink can only be connected through Wi-Fi.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 270
HondaLink HondaLink connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 275 2 Phone Setup P. 383
Places*
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to the found locations via the navigation.
Vehicle Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center.
HondaLink Menu
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 271
Messages from Honda Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
Weather Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time.
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink service.
To enable to the HondaLink service 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select the HondaLink tab. 5. Select Diagnostic & Location Data. 6. Select On.
You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink service.
Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Prompt shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
To Set Up to Connect HondaLink Service
271Continued
272
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 272
To link with HondaLink You can see the Connection Guide screen after launching HondaLink. If you do not need this guide, select check-box and select OK.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 273
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A message appears and notifies you of a
new message on the header area. u When the message is received, a
notification ring can be heard.
2. A message icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Message Icon (yellow)
273Continued
274
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 274
3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages.
4. Select a new message to open.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection Featu
res
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the Wi-Fi connection.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on Wi-Fi Network List. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 275
Wi-Fi Connection You can connect the display audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information touch screen. If your phone has cell hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Wi-Fi tab. 5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On. 6. Select Wi-Fi Network List. u Make sure your phones Wi-Fi setting is
in access point (tethering) mode. u Select the phone you want to connect to
the system. u If you do not find the phone you want to
connect in the list, select Scan. 7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for your phone, and
select OK. u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the list. 8. Select to go back to the home screen.
Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
275Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
276
Featu res
1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi- Fi connection again after you boot your phone.
iPhone users
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 276
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu
res
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.
To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the front USB port. The USB port located in the center console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay operation.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 279
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 277
Apple CarPlay If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via USB, you can use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
277Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
278
Featu res
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 278
Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.
Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
Music Play music stored on your iPhone.
Maps Display Apple CarPlay map and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay map) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.
Apple CarPlay Menu
Home Screen Apple CarPlay Menu
Go back to the home screen.
Apple CarPlay Icon Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen.
Models with navigation system
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu
res
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay: Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple CarPlay
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apples Privacy Policy.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 279
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information touch screen.
Enabling Apple CarPlay Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
Continued 279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
280
Featu res
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free
Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri Eyes Free: What movies are playing today? Call dad at work. What song is this? Hows the weather tomorrow? Read my latest email. Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 280
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri Eyes Free.
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free
(Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri Eyes Free. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu
res
1Android Auto
To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.
To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the front USB port. The USB port in the center console storage will not enable Android Auto operation.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187
To directly access the Android Auto phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Android Auto, calls are only made through Android Auto. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink, turn Android Auto OFF or detach the USB cable from your Android phone.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 283
When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Android Auto is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 281
Android Auto When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via USB, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.
2 USB Port(s*) P. 187 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 283
281Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
282
Featu res
1Android Auto
For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination.
Models with navigation system
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 282
a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when theyre needed. d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the Home screen f Voice Operate Android Auto with your voice.
Android Auto Menu
: Go back to the home screen.
Android Auto Icon
6
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu
res
1Enabling Android Auto
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup: Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android Auto
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by Googles Privacy Policy.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 283
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android Auto is automatically initiated.
Enabling Android Auto Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.
Auto Pairing Connection
Continued 283
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
284
Featu res
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: Reply to text. Call my wife. Navigate to Honda. Play my music. Send a text message to my wife. Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 284
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
(Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to deactivate voice recognition.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free Featu
res
1Siri Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 285
Siri Eyes Free You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
Using Siri Eyes Free
(Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
(Hang-up/back) Button Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.
Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free
285
286
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 286
Audio Error Messages
Solution
will be skipped. The next supported track/file lly.
t) button and remove the disc, and check that the cleared. isc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
CDs P. 293
age reappears, press the button, and pull out
disc. lays, there is a problem with the first disc. age repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, . ce the disc out of the player.
isc is not damaged or deformed. CDs P. 293
ystem off and allow the player to cool down until e is cleared.
CD Player If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
*1:Models with one display *2:Models with two displays
Error Message Cause
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported Current track/file
plays automatica
Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual Push Eject*1
Bad Disc Please check Owners Manual Please push eject button*2
Mechanical error
Press the (ejec error message is
Check that the d disc again.
2 Protecting If the error mess
the disc. Insert a different
If the new disc p If the error mess
contact a dealer Do not try to for
Mecha Error
Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual
Servo error
Check Disc Disc error Check that the d
2 Protecting
Heat Error High temperature Turn the audio s
the error messag
uuAudio Error Messagesu iPod/USB Flash Drive Featu
res
ion
er unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
isconnect the device. Then turn the audio system e that caused the error.
it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
e iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
M or an unsupported format. This error message g.
are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
.
it appears when a supported device is connected,
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 287
iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:Models with one display *2:Models with two displays
Error Message Solut
USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapt USB adapter unit.
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual*1
The connected USB device has a problem. See Owners Manual*2
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. D off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the devic
Unsupported Version Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge th
Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DR appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next son
No Data
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device
Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
287
288
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora
Featu res
Solution
e is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the . Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
list on the device. Use the device to create a
ng or select Dislike over the predetermined
peration is failed. Try again later.
with Pandora activated. Reboot the app and
s not supported. Update Pandora to the latest
r is in maintenance. Try again later.
to play music. Check your device.
s failed 10 times. Try again later. nsferring data is unstable. Try again later.
not available in the current area.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 288
Pandora If an error occurs while playing Pandora, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual
Appears when an incompatible devic audio system off, and turn it on again
There is no station list in the device. Please add the station list to your device.
Appears when there is no station station.
Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may skip each hour.
Appears when you try to skip a so number of times in an hour.
Unable to save rating. Unable to save bookmark or Unable to skip
Appears when the commanded o
No data Appears when no data is available reconnect the device.
PANDORA ver unsupport Appears when Pandora version i version.
PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora serve
Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Check your mobile phone Appears when Pandora is unable
Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.
Appears when data transfer ha Appears when condition for tra
Unable to play PANDORA. Music Licensing restricts play in this area. Appears when Pandora service is
U.S. models
Models with one display
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 289
Error Message Solution
To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
Unable to rate track. Please try again. Skip limit reached.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the predetermined number of times in an hour.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later. Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please try again later. Unable to create bookmark. Please try again later.
Appears when the commanded operation has failed. Try again later.
No Data Appears when no data is available with Pandora activated. Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
Pandora App version is not supported Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Update Pandora to the latest version.
Unable to complete the operation. Please try again later.
Appears when the Pandora server is in maintenance. Try again later.
Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.
Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora app is not installed on your device. Install Pandora app to the your device.
Models with two displays
289
290
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Featu res
on
n to close the app.
little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep e error message continues, perform Factory Data
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 290
Android/Apps If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.
Error Message*1 Soluti
Unfortunately, **** has stopped.
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the scree
**** is not responding. Would you like to close it?
App is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If th Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
Models with two displays
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 291
General Information on the Audio System
res
1Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM Radio: US: SiriusXM Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1-
800-852-9696 Canada: SiriusXM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM Radio
The SiriusXM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle. In tunnels On the lower level of a multi-tiered road Large items carried on the roof rack
SiriusXM Radio Service*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM website to subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Channel Not Subscribed: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated: SiriusXM radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Antenna Disconnected: The SiriusXM antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.
Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio
Receiving SiriusXM Radio
SiriusXM Radio Display Messages
291* Not available on all models
292
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Featu res
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 292
Recommended CDs Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs Featu
res
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
Damaged CDs
Bubbled/ Wrinkled
With Label/ Sticker
Using Printer Label Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/ Cracked
Warped Burrs
Small CDs
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 293
Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
293
294
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Featu res
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 294
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
*1:Models with one display *2:Models with two displays
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2012*1
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2010*2
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) launch in 2012*1
iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010*2
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5*1
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s*2
USB Flash Drives
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 295
Models with two displays
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Featu res
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLES USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
295Continued
296
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 296
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (THE APPLICATIONS) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDAS TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 297
About Open Source Licenses To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System, then open the Others tab. 4. Select Detail Information. 5. Select About device. 6. Select Legal information. 7. Select Open source licenses.
Models with two displays
297
298
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 298
Customized Features
1Customized Features
When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Shift to (P.
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
1How to customize
To customize other features, rotate , and press . 2 List of customizable options P. 304
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w *1, press the SETTINGS button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models with one display
SETTINGS Button
Audio/Information Screen
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 299
Customization flow
Clock Format
Background Color Header Clock Display
Factory Data Reset
Clock Adjustment
Press the SETTINGS button.
Language
Default
Edit Pairing Code
Bluetooth On/Off Bluetooth Device List
Voice Prompt
Brightness Contrast
Black Level Beep
Clock/ Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type Wallpaper
System Settings
Voice Recog
Bluetooth
Display
Clock
Others
299Continued
300
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Trip B Reset Timing
Adjust Outside Temp. Display Trip A Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Memory Position Link
Keyless Start Guidance Screens*
n
tup*
Remote Start System ON/OFF*
ACC Display Speed Unit*
Forward Collision Warning Distance*
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*
Road Departure Mitigation Setting*
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 300
Vehicle Settings
Meter Setup
TPMS Calibratio
Driving Position Se
Driver Assist
System Setup*
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Keyless Access Light Flash
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock
Door Unlock Mode
Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer
Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer Maintenance Reseto.
Keyless Access Beep
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 301
Default
Keyless Access Setup*
Lighting Setup
Door Setup
Maintenance Inf
301Continued* Not available on all models
302
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Wallpaper
Source Select Popup
Clock Type
Sound
Cover Art*1
Connect Audio*1
Bluetooth Device List*1
Clock Adjustment Clock Format
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 302
Default
Default
Audio Settings
Clock/ Wallpaper
Type Info
Settings
*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Add Bluetooth Device Disconnect
Edit Speed Dial Auto Transfer Auto Answer
Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync
Enable Text Message
Message Auto Reading
New Text Message Alert
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 303
Default
Phone Settings
Connect Phone
Text Messages
Bluetooth Device
List
Phone
Default
Camera Settings
Rear Camera
303Continued
304
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 304
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Display
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen.
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen.
Beep Selects whether a beeper sounds when you operate the selector knob.
On*1/Off
Blue- tooth
Bluetooth On/Off Turns the Bluetooth on and off. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a paired phone, and create a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 352
Random/Fixed*1
Voice Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Beginner*1/Expert
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 305
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper Type
Clock Type Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital*1/ Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper
Changes the wallpaper type. Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 195
Blank/Galaxy*1/ Metallic/Add New
Clock Adjustment Adjusts Clock. 2 Clock P. 116
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
Others
Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/ Spanish
Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen.
Blue*1/Amber/Red/ Green
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off
Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 315
Yes/No
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System Settings group as default.
Yes/No
305Continued
306
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 306
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel*1/Calibrate
Driver Assist System Setup*
Forward Collision Warning Distance* Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit* Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi- information display.
mph*1/km/h (U.S.) mph/km/h*1
(Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation Setting*
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.
Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.
On/Off*1
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 307
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)
Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off
Keyless Start Guidance Screens*
Displays the push button start guidance when conditions are met to change power mode.
On*1/Off
Remote Start System ON/ OFF* Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off
Driving Position Setup*
Memory Position Link Changes the drivers seat position to a stored setting.
On*1/Off
307Continued* Not available on all models
308
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 308
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Keyless Access Setup*
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either door handle.
On*1/Off
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
60seconds/ 30seconds*1/ 15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.
60seconds/ 30seconds/ 15seconds*1/ 0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 309
*1:Default Setting *2:Automatic transmission/CVT models
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift from P*2/Off
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.
All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/ All Doors When Shifted to Park*2/All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the drivers door or both doors to unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door*1/All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening either door.
90seconds/ 60seconds/ 30seconds*1
Mainte- nance Info.
Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle Settings group as default.
Yes/No
309Continued
310
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 310
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio Settings
Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 197
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass, Treble and SUBW*), -9 ~ C*1 ~ +9 (Fader and Balance), Off/Low/ Mid*1/High (SVC)
Source Select Popup Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources comes on when the AUDIO button is pressed.
On/Off*1
Cover Art Turns on and off the cover art display. On*1/Off
Connect Audio Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth Audio device to HFL.
Bluetooth Device List Edits or deletes a Bluetooth Audio device paired to HFL.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio Settings group as default.
Yes/No
iPod, USB, or Pandora* mode
Bluetooth Audio or Pandora* mode
Bluetooth Audio or Pandora* mode
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 311
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Info Settings
Clock/ Wall- paper type
Clock Type
See System Settings on P. 304 to P. 305 Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info Settings group as default.
Yes/No
311Continued
312
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 312
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone Settings
Connect Phone Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
Phone
Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. 2 Speed Dial P. 361
Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four seconds.
On/Off*1
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1/Off
Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 313
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone Settings
Text Messages
Enable Text Message Turns the text message function on and off. On*1/Off
New Text Message Alert Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text message.
On/Off*1
Message Auto Reading
Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text message. On- A text message is always read aloud. Off- A text message is not read aloud. Auto- A text message is read aloud only when
driving.
On/Off/Auto*1
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Yes/No
313Continued
314
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 314
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera Settings
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Camera Settings group as default.
Yes/No
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Featu
res
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset: Audio preset settings Phonebook entries Other display and each item settings.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 315
Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory Data Reset. u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to reset the settings.
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press again to reset the settings. u The confirmation message will appear.
Press to select OK.
315
316
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 316
Customized Features
1Customized Features
When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Shift to (P.
Set the parking brake.
To customize other features, select Settings. 2 List of customizable options P. 325
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
Use the audio/information touch screen to customize certain features.
How to customize With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, select Settings, then select a setting item.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models with two displays
Audio/Information Touch Screen
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 317
Customization flow
Select Settings.
Brightness Contrast
Black Level
Sound/Beep
System
Display Display Settings
Background Color
Guidance Volume Text Message Volume
Select .
Voice Recog Voice Prompt
Blue Amber
Red Violet
Voice Recog. Volume
Beep Volume
Voice Recog. Volume
Song by Voice*
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification*
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync
One Press Voice Operation
Verbal Reminder*
Blue Green
317Continued* Not available on all models
318
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res Language
k/Wallpaper Type
ock Adjustment*
Clock
Wallpaper
nual Time Zone*
Auto Daylight Clock Display
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Clock Format uto Time Zone*
Detail Information Factory Data Reset
Clock Reset
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 318
Default
System
Others
Cloc
Cl
Clock
Ma A
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
rward Collision Warning Distance*
CC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*
ad Departure Mitigation Setting*
ne Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*
Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp Display
Trip A Reset Timing Trip B Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens*
Memory Position Link
ACC Display Speed Unit*
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 319
Vehicle
Driver Assist System Setup* Fo
A
Ro
La
Meter Setup
Driving Position Setup*
TPMS Calibration
319Continued* Not available on all models
320
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock
ey and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset
Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep emote Start System On/Off*
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 320
Door Setup
K
Maintenance Info
Default
Lighting Setup
Keyless Access Setup*
R
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Sound Audio Source Pop-Up
Cover Art
HD Radio Mode*
RDS INFO Tune Start
ortsFlash Setup(Interrupt)
tsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep)
tsFlash Setup(Favorite Team)
Traffic & Weather Setup
Bluetooth Device List
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 321
Audio Common
FM/AM
SXM*
Sp
Spor
Spor
Default
321Continued* Not available on all models
322
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
allpaper Type Clock
WallpaperAdjustment*
ck Format Time Zone*
l Time Zone*
o Daylight
ck Display ock Reset
een Preference
c & Location Data
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 322
Clock/W Clock
Clo Auto
Manua
Aut
Clo Cl
Other Info Scr
Default
Clock/Info
HondaLink Diagnosti
Clock
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Bluetooth Device List Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist Enable Text/Email
Select Account
ew Message Notification
Show with Turn Signal ay Time after Turn Signal Off
Reference Line Default
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
Default
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 323
Default
Phone Phone
Text/Email
N
Camera
LaneWatch*
Displ
Rear Camera
323Continued* Not available on all models
324
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Bluetooth On/Off Status Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Wi-Fi On/Off Status Wi-Fi Network List
Wi-Fi Information
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 324
Default
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Smartphone Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 325
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Display
Display Settings
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information touch screen.
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information touch screen.
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information touch screen.
Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/ information touch screen.
Blue Green/Blue*1/ Amber/Red/Violet
Sound/ Beep
Guidance Volume Changes the sound volume. Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation system.
1~6*1~11
Text Message Volume Changes the text/e-mail message reading volume. 1~6*1~11
Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11
Verbal Reminder* Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On*1/Off
Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off/1/2*1/3
325Continued* Not available on all models
326
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 326
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Voice Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off
Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11
Song by Voice* Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off. On*1/Off
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification*
Modifies a voice command for music stored in the system or an iPod/iPhone.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 260
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook. 2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 392
Automatic Phone Sync Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On/Off
One Press Voice Operation Changes the setting of the touch screen operation when using the voice operation.
On/Off*1
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 327
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper Type
Clock Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital/ Small Digital*1/Off
Wallpaper Changes the wallpaper type. Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
Galaxy*1/Metallic/ Blank
Clock Adjustment* Adjusts clock.
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
Auto Time Zone* Automatically adjusts the clock when driving through different time zones.
On*1/Off
Manual Time Zone* Changes the time zone manually.
Auto Daylight Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this function.
On*1/Off
Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off
Clock Reset Resets the clock settings to the factory default. Yes/No
327Continued* Not available on all models
328
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 328
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Others
Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/ Spanish
Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low*1
Detail Information Displays the Android setting items.
Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
Yes/No
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System settings group as default.
Yes/No
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 329
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel*1/Calibrate
Driver Assist System Setup*
Forward Collision Warning Distance* Changes distance the CMBSTM alerts.
Long/Normal*1/ Short
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit* Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi- information display.
mph*1/km/h (U.S.) mph/km/h*1
(Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation Setting*
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.
Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.
On/Off*1
329Continued* Not available on all models
330
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 330
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language on the multi- information display.
English*1/French/ Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)
Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1
Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off
Keyless Start Guidance Screens*
Displays the push button start guidance when conditions are met to change power mode.
On*1/Off
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 331
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Driving Position Setup*
Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. On*1/Off
Keyless Access Setup*
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/ lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Remote Start System On/ Off* Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
60 sec/30 sec*1/ 15 sec
Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.
60 sec/30 sec/ 15 sec*1/0 sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min
331Continued* Not available on all models
332
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 332
*1:Default Setting *2:Automatic transmission/CVT models
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift from P*2/Off
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.
All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shift to P*2/ All Doors with IGN Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the drivers door or both doors to unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door*1/All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening either door.
90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*1
Mainte- nance Info.
Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle group as default.
Yes/No
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 333
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
Common
Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 232
-6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS and TREBLE), RR9~0*1 ~FR9 (FADER), L9~*1 0~R9 (BALANCE), -6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (Subwoofer)*, Off/Low/Mid*1/ High (Speed Volume Compensation)
Audio Source Pop- Up
Selects whether the list of selectable audio source comes on when Audio is selected on the home screen.
On/Off*1
[Your selected media] Cover Art
Turns the cover art display on and off. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
FM/AM
HD Radio Mode* Selects whether the audio system automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analogue waves only.
Auto*1/Analog
RDS INFO Turns on and off the RDS information. On*1/Off
iPod or USB mode
FM/AM mode
333Continued* Not available on all models
334
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 334
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio SXM*
Tune Start Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning as you change preset stations.
On*1/Off
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt)
Turns on and off the sports alert function. Off*1/ On(one time)/ On(continue)
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep)
Causes the system to beep when the sports alert is notified.
On*1/Off
SportsFlash Setup(Favorite Team)
Selects your favorite sports teams. 2 Live Sports Alert P. 249
Traffic & Weather Setup
Selects the region you want to receive the information.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio settings group as default.
Yes/No
SiriusXM mode
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 335
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Clock/ Info
Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper Type
Clock
See System on P. 325
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment*
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone*
Manual Time Zone*
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Clock Reset
HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data
Turns HondaLink on and off. On/Off
Other Info Screen Preference
Changes the information screen type. Info Top/Info Menu/Off*1
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/Info settings group as default.
Yes/No
335Continued* Not available on all models
336
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 336
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Phone
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. 2 Speed Dial P. 389
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. On/Off*1
Text/Email
Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On*1/Off
Select Account Selects a text or e-mail message account.
New Message Notification
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail messages.
On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.
Yes/No
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 337
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 496 On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 496 On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera setting group as default.
Yes/No
LaneWatch*
Show with Turn Signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn.
On*1/Off
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the center.
0 second*1/ 2 seconds
Reference Line Selects whether the reference lines come on the LaneWatch monitor.
On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the LaneWatch group as default.
Yes/No
337Continued* Not available on all models
338
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 338
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bluetooth/ Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Bluetooth On/Off Status
Selects to change the Bluetooth status. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
Edit Pairing Code Edits a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 384
Random/Fixed*1
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi On/Off Status Changes the Wi-Fi mode. On/Off*1
Wi-Fi Network List Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi device.
Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the device.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.
Yes/No
Smartphone Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Sets up the Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection.
Enable Once/ Always Enable/ Cancel
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Featu
res
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use HondaLink because it becomes inactive and you will have to reconnect.
2 HondaLink P. 270
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 339
Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. 6. Select Yes. 7. Select Yes again to reset the settings. u After selecting Yes, the system will
reboot.
339
340
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 340
HomeLink Universal Transceiver*
1HomeLink Universal Transceiver*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage doors path.
Important Safety Precautions
* Not available on all models
uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 341
Training HomeLink If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800)355-3515.
Red Indicator
341Continued
uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
342
Featu res
1Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
2. Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under Training a Button. You do not need to press and release the HomeLink button again in step 2.
Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.
Standard transmitter
Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the devices instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 342
Training a Button
4.
3.
2.
5. A.
B.
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work?
Press and release the HomeLink button. Press and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
Training Complete
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.
Training Complete
The remote has a rolling code. Press the learn button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.HomeLink LED is constantly on.
YES NO
YES
YES NO NO
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 343
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528 -7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be On. 2 Customized Features P. 298
Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag, a phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, use the audio systems volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number. PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
HFL Buttons
Models with one display
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up Button
Volume down
Selector Knob
PHONE Button
343Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL
344
Featu res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 298
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 344
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 361
HFL Status Display
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Roam Status
Callers Name
Callers Number
Disabled Option
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
usly paired phone with a
em. rom the system.
sly paired phone.
y PIN for a paired phone.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 345
HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.
Phone Settings screen 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
Pair a phone to the system.
Replace a previo new phone.
Connect Phone*2
Bluetooth Device List
Add Bluetooth Device
Edit PIN
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect Connect a phone to the syst Disconnect a paired phone f
(Existing entry list)
Replace This Device
Delete This Device Delete a previou
Create a securit
Add Bluetooth
Device Pair a phone to the system.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.
345Continued
346
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
Input
from tory
from ook
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
reviously stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
t Edit a previously stored speed dial number. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag.
te Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
nsfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
y answer an incoming call after about four
utomatically imported when a phone is paired to
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 346
Manual
New Entry Import Call His
Import Phoneb
Delete all of the p
Edi
Dele
(Existing entry list)
Delete All
Edit Speed Dial*1
Set calls to automatically tra vehicle.
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Set whether to automaticall seconds. Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync*1 Set phonebook data to be a HFL.
Phone
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
message function on and off.
r a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL text message.
to automatically read an incoming text message.
p as default.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 347
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Turn the text
New Text Message Alert
Message Auto Reading
Select whethe receives a new
Set the system
Text Messages*1
Default
Enable Text Message
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings grou
347Continued
348
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
nd missed calls.
e number from the call history to store as a mber. e number from the phonebook to store as a mber.
number to store as a speed dial number.
s speed dial list. e speed dial list.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 348
Phone menu screen 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Phone menu
Speed Dial
Redial
Call History Text messages
Dial
Phonebook
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming a
Select a phon speed dial nu
Call History*1
Speed Dial*1
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received Display the last 20 outgoing calls. Display the last 20 incoming calls.
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Select a phon speed dial nu
Enter a phone
More Speed Dials Display another paired phone
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.
Dial*1
Redial*1
Enter a phone number to dial. Redial the last number dialed in the phones history.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in th
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
See the previous message.age
e See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 349
Text Messages*1
Read/Stop
Previous Mess
Next Messag
Phonebook*1 Display the paired phones phonebook.
Message is read aloud.
Reply
Call
Select a message and press .
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
349Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
350
Featu res
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phones battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL. If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call history and phonebook automatically imported to HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting P. 360
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 350
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 351
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
351Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
352
Featu res
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 352
To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code. 3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
Edit Pairing Code
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial entries, call history, and security PIN information from the previously paired phone.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 353
To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .
3. Rotate to select a paired phone you want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate to select Replace This Device, then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches a new phone. u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Continued 353
354
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 354
To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete This Device, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if it is successful.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 355
To turn on or off the text message function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Text Messages, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .
To Set Up Text Message Options
355Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
356
Featu res
1To turn on or off the text message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message is always read aloud. Off: A text message is not read aloud. Auto: A text message is read aloud only when driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 356
To turn on or off the text message notice
1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate to select New Text Message Alert, then press .
2. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .
To set up the auto reading option 1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate
to select Message Auto Reading, then press . u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then press .
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you need to enter the current security PIN before clearing the PIN or creating a new one.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 357
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press . 5. Enter a new four-digit number. u Rotate to select, then press .
Press to delete. Press OK to enter the security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number. u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.
To Create a Security PIN
Continued 357
358
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 358
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .
Automatic Transferring
Auto Answer
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker. Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the connected cell phone sounds from the speaker. Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 359
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone. 3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
Ring Tone
Continued 359
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
360
Featu res
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 360
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync. 3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say Call and the voice tag name.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 361
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New Entry.
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the linked cell
phones imported phonebook. 4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import from Phonebook, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
Speed Dial
Mr.AAA 111AAA####
555EEE####
444DDD####
333CCC####
222BBB####
Mr.EEE
Mr.DDD
Mr.CCC
Mr.BBB
Select a method to store
Continued 361
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
362
Featu res
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using home as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 362
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Record, then press . 5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 363
To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Clear, then press . 5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Delete, then press . 4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
363Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
364
Featu res
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say Call and the phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice tag.
The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 364
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
Making a Call
Phone menu
Speed Dial
Redial
Call History Text messages
Dial
Phonebook
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344 2 Speed Dial P. 361
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 365
To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
3. Rotate to select a name, then press . u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued 365
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
366
Featu res
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344 2 Speed Dial P. 361
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 366
To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press
. 4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using redial 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Select More Speed Dials to view another paired phones speed dial list. You can make a call from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 361
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the corresponding preset buttons from the Phone screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 367
To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .
3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued 367
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
368
Featu res
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current call. Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 368
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.
Receiving a Call
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 369
The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.
Press the MENU button to display the options. Rotate to select the mute option, then press . u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Options During a Call
Mute Icon
Continued 369
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
370
Featu res
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message for the first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Text Message Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text message notice P. 356
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 370
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message.
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the message, then press . u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press .
Receiving a Text Message
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Displaying Text Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.
To see the previous or next message, press on the text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message, then press .
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 371
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Text Messages, then
press . 4. Rotate to select a message, then press
. u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Displaying Text Messages
Message List
Text Message
Continued 371
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
372
Featu res
1Using the Stop or Read option
This option changes to: Stop while the text message is read out. Select this
option to discontinue the message read out. Read when the system has finished reading out the
text message, or after you selected Stop. Select this option to hear the system read out the selected message.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 372
Using the Stop or Read option 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then press .
Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Reply, then press . 4. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message. u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 373
Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Call, then press .
373
374
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 374
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, ask a dealer or your local Honda.
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HFL is unavailable.
2 How to customize P. 316
Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones.
Press the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, select the audio system's VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 389
Up to five call histories can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
Models with two displays
(Talk) Button
Volume up
Microphone
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Volume down MENU Button
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu
res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 375
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. MENU button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone screen.
To go to the Phone menu screen: 1. Select . 2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen. 3. Select .
Continued 375
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL
376
Featu res
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen and audio/information touch screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language. 2 How to customize P. 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 376
The audio/information screen and audio/information touch screen notify you when there is an incoming call.
HFL Status Display
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Callers Name
Callers Number
Roaming Status
Audio/information touch screen
Callers Name
Callers Number
Audio/information screen
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
Battery Level Status
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 377
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 389
Limitations for Manual Operation
377
378
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Disconnect
Delete Delete a paired phone.
phone to the system.
Connect a paired device to the system.
onnect Connect Connect
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 378
HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use the system.
Phone settings screen 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Phone.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Bluetooth Device List (Existing entry list)
Add Bluetooth Device Pair a new
Phone
C
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
ry
ok
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
usly stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit a previously stored speed dial number. Change a name. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
atically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 379
Manual InputNew Entry
Import from Call Histo
Import from Phonebo
Edit
Delete
(Existing entry list)Edit Speed Dial
Delete All Delete all of the previo
Ring Tone Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync Set phonebook and call history data to be autom
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.HondaLink Assist
379Continued
380
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
er a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL w text/e-mail message.
t/e-mail message function on and off.
l or text message account.
settings group as default.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 380
Select Account
Enable Text/EmailText/Email
New Message Notification Select wheth receives a ne
Turn the tex
Select a mai
Default Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
ming and missed calls.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
.
.
y
k Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
in the speed dial list.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 381
Phone menu screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select .
Display the last outgoing, incoCall History
Speed Dial
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received
Display the last outgoing calls
Display the last incoming calls
New Entry
Import from Call Histor
Import from Phoneboo
Missed Display the last missed calls.
Dial
Redial
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number
Phonebook Display the paired phones phonebook.
381Continued
382
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
See the previous message.
See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.
ssage account.
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 382
Text/Email Read/Stop(Existing a message list)
Select Account Select a mail or text me
Call
Reply
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands- free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system. If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth- compatible devices is unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 383
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone. 2. Select Yes. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select Continue. u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list. u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information touch screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
Phone Setup
Continued 383
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
384
Featu res
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth device list screen.
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 384
To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired phone.
4. Select Connect , Connect , or Connect .
To change the pairing code setting 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Bluetooth tab. 5. Select Edit Pairing Code.
6. Select Random or Fixed.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 385
To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Delete. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
385Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
386
Featu res
1To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options
To use the text message/e-mail function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 386
To turn on or off the text/e-mail function
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable Text/Email. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New Message Notification. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the connected cell phone sounds from the speakers.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 387
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Ring Tone. 3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.
Ring Tone
Continued 387
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
388
Featu res
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
Pref
Blank
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 388
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.
Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Select On or Off.
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 389
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell
phones imported phonebook. 4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No.
5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry. u Using the button, follow the prompts
to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
Speed Dial
Continued 389
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
390
Featu res
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using home as a voice tag. It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 390
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 391
To edit a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select a setting you want.
To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
391Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
392
Featu res
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 392
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phones contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
To add a new voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to add
phonetic modification to.
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 393
7. Select New Voice Tag. 8. Select a contact name you want to add to. u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen. 9. Select Modify.
10. Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
11. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.
393Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
394
Featu res
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 394
To modify a voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to modify
phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to
modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen. 8. Select Modify. 9. Using Record or the button, follow the
prompts to complete the voice tag. 10. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 395
To delete a modified voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Select Delete. u The selected contact name has been
selected. 9. Select OK.
395Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
396
Featu res
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say the voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, phone calls cannot be made with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink and are only made from Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 396
To delete all modified voice tags 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification. u The contact name list appears.
7. Select Delete All. 8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen, then select Yes.
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
Making a Call
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 397
To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select a name. u You can also search by letter. Select
Search. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering name, if multiple numbers exist select a number.
4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Dial. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers. 4. Select Dial. u Dialing starts automatically.
397Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
398
Featu res
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed.
1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)
1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 389
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 398
To make a call using redial 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Redial. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Call History. 3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a Speed Dial entry 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information touch screen instead of the and buttons.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 399
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the incoming call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.
Receiving a Call
Continued 399
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
400
Featu res
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information touch screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 400
The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower half of the audio/information touch screen.
Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Options During a Call
Audio/information screen
Mute Icon
Mute Icon
Audio/information touch screen
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
The system can only receive massages that are sent a text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages and e-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/e-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message or e-mail for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice P. 386
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 401
HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message or e-mail.
2. Select Read to listen to the message. u The text message or e-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
Continued 401
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
402
Featu res
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list screen or the message list screen.
You can only receive notifications from one text message or mail account at a time.
Select Account
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 402
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select Account. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Message or an e-mail account you want.
Selecting a Mail Account
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select or on the message screen.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 403
Displaying text messages 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Text/Email. u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Displaying Messages
Message List
Text Message
Continued 403
404
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 404
Displaying e-mails 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Text/Email. u Select Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder. 4. Select a message. u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Folder List
Message List
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 405
Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 403
2. Select Stop to stop reading. Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning.
Reply to a message 1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 403
2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message. u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
Continued 405
406
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 406
Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Call.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when: You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas. There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 407
Automatic collision notification If your vehicles airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition will be sent to the operator; you also can speak to the operator when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.
In Case of Emergency
Continued 407
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
408
Featu res
1To enable notification
Setting options: On: Notification is available. Off: Disable the feature.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 408
To enable notification 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 409
Compass*
res
1Compass*
Compass operation can be affected under the following conditions: Driving near power lines or stations Crossing a bridge Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, select to cancel the setting mode and return to the previous screen.
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears.
Compass Calibration If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds. u The display switches to the Compass
settings screen. 3. Select Calibration. 4. Select Calibration Start. 5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator goes off.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
409* Not available on all models
410
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection
Featu res
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 410
Compass Zone Selection 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds. u The display switches to the Compass
settings screen. 3. Select Zone Adjust. u The display shows the current zone
number the system is set to. 4. Select the zone number of your area (See
Zone Map).
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
2
3
4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12
13 14
15 Zone Map
Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11
* Not available on all m
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 411
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving Driving Preparation .......................... 412 Maximum Load Limit........................ 415
Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation.......................... 417 Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 419 Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 420
When Driving Starting the Engine .................. 421, 423 Precautions While Driving................. 428 Automatic Transmission/CVT*.......... 429 Shifting............................ 430, 434, 438 ECON Button ................................... 441
odels
Cruise Control ................................. 442 Front Sensor Camera* ..................... 445 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*....... 447 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* ...... 460 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*.... 464 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System........... 471
LaneWatchTM*.................................. 473 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 475 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation ......... 477
Braking Brake System ................................... 479
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 481 Brake Assist System ......................... 482 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* ..................................... 483
Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped ................................ 491 Parking Sensor System* ................... 492
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 496 Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 497 How to Refuel ................................. 498
Fuel Economy Improving Fuel Economy.................. 499
Accessories and Modifications ........ 500
411
412
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 412
Before Driving
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving.
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components. Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537
Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
Exterior Checks
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation D
rivin g
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 413
Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking. Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving. If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock both doors and the trunk. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126
Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 161 2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 164
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 159 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 158
Interior Checks
Continued 413
414
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 414
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 37
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 70
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit D
rivin g
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.
2 Specifications P. 582, 584
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 582, 584
3WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 415
Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit - (1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Label Example
415Continued
416
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 416
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight 550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 417
Towing a Trailer
rivin g
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the tongue load.
Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 582, 584
3WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
Total trailer weight Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.
Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight. Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear. Readjust the load as needed.
Towing Load Limits
Total Load
Tongue LoadTong
417Continued
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
418
D rivin
g
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 418
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you are towing.
Hitches The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.
Additional towing equipment Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Towing Equipment and Accessories
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer D
rivin g
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 419
Driving Safely with a Trailer
Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 417
Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving. Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
Drive slower than normal. Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly.
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Turning and Braking
Automatic transmission/CVT models
419Continued
420
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 420
Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
Towing Your Vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 580
Driving in Hilly Terrain
Automatic transmission models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 421
When Driving
rivin g
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently below -22F (-30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P .
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot. u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models without smart entry system
Brake Pedal
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal Manual transmission models
421Continued
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
422
D rivin
g
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 30 seconds before trying again. If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 133
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 422
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 479
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Starting to Drive Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently below -22F (-30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 133
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 423
Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P .
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot. u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models with smart entry system
Brake Pedal
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal Manual transmission models
423Continued
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
424
D rivin
g
1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 564
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 424
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Shift to (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
If the shift lever is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N , depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
All models
Stopping the Engine
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
1Remote Engine Start*
If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. While the vehicle is moving, the range may be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start if: You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the multi-information display* or audio/ information touch screen*.
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). The shift lever is in a position other than (P. The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked. You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine. Another registered smart entry remote is in the
vehicle.
3WARNING Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon monoxide.
Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter when the vehicle is parked in a garage or other area with limited ventilation.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 425
You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote.
To start the engine
The engine runs for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle. To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button. u The turn signal lights come back on three times, twice, if a 10-minute
extension request was transmitted successfully.
Remote Engine Start*
With the doors locked, press the button, then press and hold the button.
Continued 425* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
426
D rivin
g
1Remote Engine Start*
There is any antenna failure. Door is unlocked with the built-in key. The engine oil pressure is low. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The security system alarm is not set.
The engine may stop while it is running if: You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the button on the smart entry remote.
The engine is stopped by using the smart entry remote.
Door is unlocked with the built-in key. The hood is open. The shift lever is in a position other than (P. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The engine oil pressure is low. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on if
there is a problem with the emissions control systems.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside: The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode. When it is cold outside: The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature. The rear defogger and door mirror heaters* are
activated.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 426
To stop the engine
Press and hold the button for one second.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
1Starting to Drive
The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.
When the engine was started using the button* on the smart entry remote
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 427
1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 479
3. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission/CVT models
When the engine was started using the button* on the smart entry remote
When the engine was started in any case
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/CVT models
427* Not available on all models
428
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
D rivin
g
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.
NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 428
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
In Rain
Other Precautions
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 429
Automatic Transmission/CVT*
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
Creeping
Kickdown
429* Not available on all models
430
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
D rivin
g
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 430
Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift lever positions
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
Reverse Used when reversing
Drive Used: For normal driving When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral Used when idling
Release Button Drive (S) Used: For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 431
Shift Lever Operation
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Tachometers red zone
Models with multi-information display
Models with information display
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Tachometers red zone
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator
Continued 431
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
432
D rivin
g
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift indicator remains as 7.
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions: Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position. Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically. When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7- speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal D driving mode.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 432
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.
When the shift lever is in (D: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator. The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off. You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds. The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.
When the shift lever is in (S: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator go off.
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change. To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel efficiency and reduce emissions.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1 to 2 15 mph (24 km/h) 2 to 3 25 mph (40 km/h) 3 to 4 40 mph (64 km/h) 4 to 5 45 mph (72 km/h) 5 to 6 50 mph (80 km/h) 6 to 7 55 mph (89 km/h)
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 433
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to lower speed number)
Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to higher speed number)
433
434
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
D rivin
g
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 434
Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift lever positions
Automatic transmission models
Reverse Used when reversing
Drive Used for: Normal driving (gears change between
1st and 6th automatically) Temporally driving in the sequential
mode
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral Used when idling
Release Button Drive (S) Automatically changing gears between
1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at high speed)
Used when towing a trailer in hilly terrain
Used for driving in the sequential mode
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometers red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 435
Shift Lever Operation
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Tachometers red zone
Models with multi-information display
Models with information display
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Tachometers red zone
M (Sequential Shift Mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator
M (Sequential Shift Mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Continued 435
436
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 436
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift mode.
When the shift lever is in (D: The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.
When the shift lever is in (S: The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode) indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the vehicle automatically shift down into 1st gear.
If you do not operate the paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission automatically shift up to 2nd gear. It does not shift automatically from 2nd through 6th gears.
You can only pull away in 1st and 2nd gear.
When canceling the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position indicator go off.
Sequential Shift Mode
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Sequential Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change. To change gear continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel efficiency and reduce emissions.
The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) 3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h) 4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h) 5th to 6th 52 mph (84 km/h)
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 437
Second gear lock mode If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever from (S to (D.
Sequential Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to a lower gear)
Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to a higher gear)
437
438
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
D rivin
g
1Shifting
NOTICE Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the transmission.
NOTICE Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur, it can severely damage your engine.
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel cold.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 438
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not grind.
Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h) 3rd to 4th 37 mph (60 km/h) 4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h) 5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) 3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h) 4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h) 5th to 6th 52 mph (84 km/h)
4-cylinder models U.S. LX-S and Canadian LX models
4-cylinder models Except U.S. LX-S and Canadian LX models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 439
When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Continued 439
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
440
D rivin
g
1Shifting
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. When this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 17 mph (28 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 27 mph (44 km/h) 3rd to 4th 36 mph (57 km/h) 4th to 5th 41 mph (66 km/h) 5th to 6th 44 mph (71 km/h)
6-cylinder models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 440
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following: 1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R. 2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R . 4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Reverse Lockout
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 441
ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system, and cruise control.
*
441* Not available on all models
442
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
D rivin
g
1Cruise Control
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill.
When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE*/ MAIN* button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
When the engine speed slows down, try to downshift. You can maintain the set speed if you change gear within five seconds.
3WARNING Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
Manual transmission models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 442
Cruise Control Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
When to use
Shift positions for cruise control: In (D or (S
Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Vehicle speed for cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
How to use
CRUISE MAIN*/CRUISE MODE* is on in the instrument panel. Cruise control is ready to use.
Press the CRUISE*/ MAIN* button on the steering wheel.
Models without ACC
Models with ACC
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 443
Take your foot off the pedal and press the /SET button when you reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the /SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the steering angle on a straight road with cants.
To Set the Vehicle Speed
/SET Button
On when cruise control beginsPress and release
On
On
Models without ACC
Models with ACC
Models without adaptive cruise control
443Continued
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
444
D rivin
g
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the /SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations: When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) When the CRUISE*/MAIN* button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 444
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or /SET buttons on the steering wheel.
Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. Press the CRUISE*/MAIN* button. Depress the brake pedal. Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
To Cancel
To decrease speed
To increase speed
CRUISE*/ MAIN* Button
CANCEL Button
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera* D
rivin g
1Front Sensor Camera*
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could obstruct the cameras field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the cameras field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the cameras field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 445
Front Sensor Camera*
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the cameras sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
Camera Location and Handling Tips
Front Sensor Camera
445Continued* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera*
446
D rivin
g
1Front Sensor Camera*
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 446
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D
rivin g
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other vehicles.
Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly impacted.
3WARNING Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
Use ACC only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
3WARNING ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicles brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 447
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
When to use
Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
Shift position for ACC: In (D or (S.
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
447Continued* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
448
D rivin
g
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or off.
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 452
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Do not use ACC under the following conditions: On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic. On roads with sharp turns. On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 448
How to use
Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.
ACC is on in the multi- information display. ACC is ready to use.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D
rivin g
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the multi-information display between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 449
Take your foot off the pedal and press down the /SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins.
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, distance bars and set speed appear on the multi-information display.
To Set the Vehicle Speed
On when ACC begins
Press and release
/SET Button
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Distance
Continued 449
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
450
D rivin
g
1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in front of you, the beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display. Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate distance from the vehicle ahead.
Even if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the distance between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle detected in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316
Beep
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 450
There is a vehicle ahead ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicles set speed in order to keep the vehicles set following-distance from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-Distance P. 455
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you and is detected by the radar, your vehicle starts to slow down.
When in Operation
ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
A vehicle icon appears on the multi-information display.
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D
rivin g
1When you depress the accelerator pedal
While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system does not apply the brakes to keep the following- distance, as well as the BRAKE message on the multi- information display does not appear.
2 When in Operation P. 450
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 451
There is no vehicle ahead Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed or a sufficient speed to keep the following-distance.
A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the multi- information display.
Continued 451
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
452
D rivin
g
1ACC Conditions and Limitations
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 483
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc. You drive the vehicle where the water is deep. Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 452
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Vehicle conditions The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The camera temperature gets too high. The parking brake is applied. When the radar sensor cover is dirty. When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats. When tire chains are installed.
ACC Conditions and Limitations
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 453
Detection limitations A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle. When there are animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you. The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large. An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. When driving through a narrow iron bridge. When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape. When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
453Continued
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
454
D rivin
g
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set following-distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 454
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or /SET buttons on the steering wheel.
Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
To increase speed
To decrease speed
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 455
Press the (distance) button to change the ACC following-distance. Each time you press the button, the following- distance (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through extra long, long, middle, and short following- distances.
Determine the most appropriate following- distance setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-distance requirements set by local regulation.
To Set or Change Following-Distance
Distance Button
455Continued
456
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 456
The higher your vehicles following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-distance becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
Vehicle Distance When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short 84 feet
26 meters 1.1 sec
102 feet 31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle 111 feet
34 meters 1.5 sec
139 feet 43 meters
1.5 sec
Long 155 feet
48 meters 2.1 sec
202 feet 62 meters
2.1 sec
Extra Long
215 feet 66 meters
3.0 sec
285 feet 87 meters
3.0 sec
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D
rivin g
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 457
To cancel ACC, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. Press the MAIN button. u The ACC indicator (white) goes off.
Depress the brake pedal.
To Cancel
CANCEL Button
MAIN Button
Continued 457
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
458
D rivin
g
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 458
Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel: Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty. The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. Abrupt steering wheel movement. When the ABS, VSA or CMBSTM is activated. When the ABS or VSA system indicator comes on. When you manually apply the parking brake. When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D
rivin g
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-distance from a vehicle ahead of you.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 459
Press and hold the (distance) button for one second.
Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second.
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
ACC ON Cruise Control ON
Distance Button
459
460
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
D rivin
g
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 462
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 460
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.
The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the multi-information display.
If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking. u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.
How the System Works
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* D
rivin g
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on. 2 Indicators P. 70
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: Not driven within a traffic lane. Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane. Driven in a narrow lane.
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the multi-information display, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 461
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in continuous operation. The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the multi- information display when the system is on.
How the System Activates
RDM On and Off
RDM Button
Indicator
Continued 461
462
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 462
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
RDM Conditions and Limitations
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 463
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings. The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk). The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines). Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. When tire chains are installed.
463
464
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
D rivin
g
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* P. 96
Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 469
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 464
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. () If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
LKAS camera Monitors the lane lines.
Tactile and visual alerts Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* D
rivin g
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
The LKAS may not function as designed on while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected, system will recover automatically.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 465
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
Lane Keep Support Function
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
Continued 465* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
466
D rivin
g
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 466
The system can be used when the following conditions are met. The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane. The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in continuous operation.
How to activate the system 1. Press the MAIN button. u The LKAS is on in the multi-information
display. The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the multi-
information display. The system is activated.
When the System can be Used
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* D
rivin g
1When the System can be Used
The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines again, it comes back on automatically.
1To cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 467
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.
To cancel the LKAS: Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.
To cancel
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
Continued 467
468
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 468
The system operation is suspended if you:
Set the wipers to continuous operation. u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate continuously. u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate intermittently.
Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.
Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.
The LKAS may automatically be suspended when: The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is quickly turned. You fail to steer the vehicle. The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit. Driving through a sharp curve. Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the multi- information display change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
All models
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 469
The LKAS may automatically be canceled when: The camera temperature gets extremely high or low. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty. The ABS or VSA system engages. The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
469Continued
470
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 470
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings. The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk). The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines). Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D
rivin g
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
VSA cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 471
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink.
VSA Operation
VSA System Indicator
471Continued
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
472
D rivin
g
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
With the button pressed, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA traction and stability enhancement becomes less effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 472
This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially turn the VSA features on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning, allows the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. The VSA OFF indicator will also come on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA OFF) button until you hear a beep.
VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
VSA OFF Button
VSA OFF Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM* D
rivin g
1LaneWatchTM*
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions: Your vehicles suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle. Your tires are over or under inflated. Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.
3WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 473
LaneWatchTM*
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passengers side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving.
1 2
CameraAudio/Information Screen
Move the turn signal lever to the passenger side.
Press the LaneWatch button.
Pull the turn signal lever back.
Press the LaneWatch button again.
The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen.
The system activates when you:
The system deactivates when you:
473Continued* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
474
D rivin
g
1LaneWatchTM*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen look slightly different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R.
For proper LaneWatch operation: The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers of any kind.
Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if: The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the camera angle.
The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 474
Customizing the LaneWatch settings You can customize the following items using the audio/information touch screen. Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever. Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor. Display Time after Turn Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch display time
after you pull the turn signal lever back. Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 316
Reference Lines Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 farther away.
2 3
1
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D
rivin g
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in: Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather. Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when: You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel. You drive on snowy or slippery roads. Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions: A compact spare tire is used. There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at calibration.
Snow chains are used.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 475
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on and a message to appear on the multi-information display*.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you: Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. Rotate the tires. Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS: Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 537
Make sure: The vehicle is at a complete stop.
The shift lever is in (N .
The shift lever is in (P .
The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
TPMS Calibration
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
475Continued* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
476
D rivin
g
1TPMS Calibration
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed.
The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
During this period, if the ignition is turned on and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.
You can calibrate the system using the audio/ information screen* or audio/information touch screen*.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 476
Press and hold the TPMS button until the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice, indicating the calibration process has begun. If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions then press and hold the TPMS button again.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
You can calibrate the system from the customized features on the multi-information display. 1. Press the / button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button. u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button. u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.
3. Press the / button and select Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET button. u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the customization menu screen.
If the Calibration Failed to Start message appears, repeat steps 2-3.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
TPMS Button
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
4
4
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 477
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
477Continued
478
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 478
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 479
Braking
rivin g
1Parking Brake
NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release Parking Brake appears on the multi-information display*.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Pull the lever fully up without pressing the release button.
To release: 1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button. 2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
Parking Brake
479Continued* Not available on all models
uuBrakinguBrake System
480
D rivin
g
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 480
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 482 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 481
Foot Brake
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) D
rivin g
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS: When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
When snow chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 481
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.
ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
ABS
481
482
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 482
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
Brake Assist System
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D
rivin g
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 487
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly impacted.
1How the system works
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you.
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 483
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
How the system works
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
When to use
The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
483Continued* Not available on all models
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
484
D rivin
g
1When the system activates
The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 487
The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front end of the dashboard. Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
Lens
1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator P. 77
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 484
When the system activates
At systems earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/ Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multi- information display setting options.
2 List of customizable options P. 109
Vibration alert on the steering wheel When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Beep
Head-up Warning Lights
Visual Alerts
Audible Alert Tactile Alert
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 485
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBSTM
The radar sensor detects a vehicle
Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel Braking
Stage one
There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you.
When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.
In case of an oncoming vehicle detected, rapid vibration is provided.
Stage two
The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts.
Lightly applied
Stage three
The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable.
Forcefully applied
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
Normal ShortLong
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
485Continued
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
486
D rivin
g
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 487
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 486
Press this button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off.
When the CMBSTM is off: The beeper sounds. The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on. A message on the multi-information display
reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBSTM is in the previously selected ON or OFF setting each time you start the engine.
CMBSTM On and Off
* Not available on all models
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 487
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between objects and the background. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
487Continued* Not available on all models
488
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 488
Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The camera temperature gets too high. Driving with the parking brake applied. When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
Detection limitations A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle. When there are animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large. An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. When driving through a narrow iron bridge. When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D
rivin g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 489
When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrians shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
When a pedestrian blends in with the background. When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running. When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
489Continued
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
490
D rivin
g
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
For the CMBSTM to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc. You drive the vehicle where the water is deep. Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 490
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.
Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
With Little Chance of a Collision
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 491
Parking Your Vehicle
rivin g
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously. Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal. Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1.
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
All models
491
492
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
D rivin
g
1Parking Sensor System*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when: The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt. The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill. The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves. Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense: Thin or low objects. Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge. Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 492
Parking Sensor System*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.
The sensor location and range
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less
Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors
Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less
Rear Center Sensors
* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D
rivin g
1Parking Sensor System*
When you set the power mode to ON, the system will be in the previously selected condition.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 493
Parking sensor system on and off With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on.
The rear center and corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The front corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in any position other than (P, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Continued 493* Not available on all models
494
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 494
When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter
*1:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Length of the intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle Indicator Audio/information screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate Rear: About 43-24 in
(110-60 cm) Blinks in Yellow*1
Short About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm) About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm) Blinks in Amber
Very short About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm) About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
Continuous About 14 in
(35 cm) or less About 14 in
(35 cm) or less Blinks in Red
Indicators light where the sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light where the sensor detects an obstacle.
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D
rivin g
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you shift to (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 495
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON. 3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button blinks. 4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.
Turning off All Rear Sensors
495
496
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 496
Multi-View Rear Camera
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R. Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move.
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicles rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the selector knob or the interface dial to switch the angle.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected. If you shift out of (R in Top View mode, then shift into (R again 10 seconds later, Wide mode is selected.
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Top Down View Mode
Normal View Mode
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 497
Refueling
rivin g
1Fuel Information
NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
Fuel Information Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.
Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
497
498
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
D rivin
g
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.
3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 498
How to Refuel 1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
2. Turn off the engine. 3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the drivers seat. u The fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 6. Insert the filler nozzle fully. u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
Push
Cap
Cap
Holder
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 499
Fuel Economy
rivin g
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven Gallons of fuel
Miles per Gallon
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
Improving Fuel Economy Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the information display*/multi-information display*. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal. Maintain the specified tire pressure. Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
499* Not available on all models
500
D rivin
g
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 500
Accessories and Modifications
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.
Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicles airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 576
Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 501
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 502 Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 503 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 504
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 505 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 513 Opening the Hood ........................... 515 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 517 Oil Check......................................... 518 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 520 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 521
Engine Coolant ................................ 523 Transmission Fluid............................ 525 Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 527 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 528
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 529 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 535
Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 537 Tire and Loading Information Label ..... 538 Tire Labeling .................................... 538 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)...... 540 Wear Indicators................................ 542
Tire Service Life................................ 542 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 543 Tire Rotation.................................... 544 Winter Tires ..................................... 545
Battery............................................... 546 Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 547 Climate Control System Maintenance ....549 Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 550 Exterior Care.................................... 552
501
502
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 502
Before Performing Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are certified to EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the information display*/multi- information display*.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 507, 511
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 593
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)
Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
Periodic inspections Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 527
Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537
Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 529
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 535
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
* Not available on all models
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance M
ain ten
an ce
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 503
Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off. Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts. Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
Maintenance Safety
Vehicle Safety
503
504
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 504
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 505
Maintenance MinderTM
ain ten
an ce
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 507
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)
100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the information display*/multi-information display* every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the information display. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays on in the instrument panel after the engine oil life becomes 0%. Have the indicated maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Models with information display
505Continued* Not available on all models
506
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 506
To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator
The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life.
Starts to come on when the remaining engine oil life becomes 15 percent. It goes off when the display is switched.
The SERVICE message also starts to appear along with the engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item codes.
The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.
The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). The negative distance on the display blinks.
The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M
ain ten
an ce
1Maintenance Service Items
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
onditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). transmission (CVT) models s areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
quires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission 5,000 miles (40,000 km).
in very high temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C), in very low temperatures (under w a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2
ace dust and pollen filter*3
ct drive belt ace transmission fluid*4,*5
ace spark plugs ace timing belt and inspect water pump*6,*7
ct valve clearance ace engine coolant
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 507
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder MessageMaintenance
Minder Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1
B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections# *2: If you drive in dusty c *3: If you drive primarily
from diesel-powered *4: Continuously variable *5: Driving in mountainou
temperatures. This re Maintenance Minder. fluid changed every 2
*6: 6-cylinder models *7: If you drive regularly
-20 F, -29 C), or to
CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl
Repl Inspe
3 Repl 4 Repl
Repl Inspe
5 Repl
507Continued
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
508
M ain
ten an
ce
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.
You can reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen* or audio/ information touch screen*.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 508
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the (Select/Reset) knob. 3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds
or more. u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the knob for five seconds or more. u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Resetting the Display
* Not available on all models
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M
ain ten
an ce
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 511
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)
100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 509
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the multi-information display. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the (Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears
on the multi-information display.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Models with multi-information display
Button
Maintenance Item Codes
Remaining Engine Oil Life
509Continued
510
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 510
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent. Once you switch the
display by pressing the (Information) button, this message will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced soon.
Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Press the button to switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another display.
The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately.
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M
ain ten
an ce
1Maintenance Service Items
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
onditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). transmission (CVT) models
us areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission quires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission 5,000 miles (40,000 km).
in very high temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C), in very low temperatures (under - a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2
ace dust and pollen filter*3
ct drive belt ace transmission fluid*4, *5
ace spark plugs ace timing belt and inspect water pump*6, *7
ct valve clearance ace engine coolant
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 511
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder MessageSystem Message
Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
*1: If a message Service does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1
B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections# *2: If you drive in dusty c *3: If you drive primarily
from diesel-powered *4: Continuously variable *5: Driving in mountaino
temperatures. This re Maintenance Minder. fluid changed every 2
*6: 6-cylinder models *7: If you drive regularly
20 F, -29 C), or tow
CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl
Repl Inspe
3 Repl 4 Repl
Repl Inspe
5 Repl
511Continued
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
512
M ain
ten an
ce
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.
You can reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen* or audio/ information touch screen*.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 512
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button. 3. Press the button until Maintenance Reset appears on the display. 4. Press the SEL/RESET button. u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
5. Select Reset with the button, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Resetting the Display
Engine Oil Life
SEL/RESET Button
Maintenance Item Codes (Information) Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 513
Maintenance Under the Hood
ain ten
an ce
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Clutch Fluid (Light Gray Cap)
Battery
Manual transmission models
Maintenance Items Under the Hood 4-cylinder models
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
513Continued
514
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
M ain
ten an
ce
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Battery
Clutch Fluid (Light Gray Cap)
Manual transmission models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 514
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)
Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Engine Oil Fill Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood M
ain ten
an ce
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 515
Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center of the hood to release the lock mechanism, and open the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
4-cylinder models
515Continued
516
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 516
4. Lift the hood up most of the way. u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12 inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with your hands.
6-cylinder models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil M
ain ten
an ce
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 517
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.
Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown here.
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.
Genuine Honda Motor Oil Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Ambient Temperature
517
518
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
M ain
ten an
ce
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil being careful not to overfill.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 518
Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check M
ain ten
an ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 519
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Upper Mark Lower Mark
519
520
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
M ain
ten an
ce
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 520
Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Engine Oil Fill Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter M
ain ten
an ce
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 521
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the information display*/multi-information display*.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Drain Bolt
Washer
Drain Bolt
Washer
521Continued* Not available on all models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
522
M ain
ten an
ce
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 522
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket. 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque:
30 lbfft (40 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)
29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm) 8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
4.5 US qt (4.3 L) 9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine. 10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Oil Filter
Oil Filter
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant M
ain ten
an ce
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE If temperatures consistently below 22F (30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 523
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Reserve Tank
Reserve Tank
MAX
MIN
523Continued
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
524
M ain
ten an
ce
1Radiator
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 524
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.
Radiator
Radiator Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid M
ain ten
an ce
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil as a temporary measure. Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does not contain the proper additives for the transmission and continued use can cause decreased shifting performance and lead to transmission damage.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 525
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: HCF-2
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
4-cylinder models with continuously variable transmission (CVT)
4-cylinder/6-cylinder models with manual transmission
525Continued
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
526
M ain
ten an
ce
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 526
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
6-cylinder models with automatic transmission
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid M
ain ten
an ce
1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.
1Checking the Clutch Fluid
If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn clutch plate as soon as possible.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 527
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
Checking the Clutch Fluid
Manual transmission models
Clutch Reservoir
MIN
MAX
527
528
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
M ain
ten an
ce
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 528
Refilling Window Washer Fluid Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, the washer level indicator comes on.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the multi-information display.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
Canadian models with information display
Canadian models with multi-information display
All models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 529
Replacing Light Bulbs
ain ten
an ce
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Models with halogen headlights
All models
Models with halogen headlights
1High Beam Headlights
High beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Models with LED headlights
Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the upper part of the air intake duct and the air intake tube.
1. Remove the reserve tank.
High beam headlight: LED type*
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)*
Low beam headlight: LED type*
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)*
High Beam Headlights Models with halogen headlights
Tube
Holding Clip
Holding Clips
Driver side
6-cylinder models
Passenger side
All models
529Continued* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
530
M ain
ten an
ce
1High Beam Headlights
Press down the center pin until it clicks to unlock it.
Push the center pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert the clip into the hole and press on the center pin until it is flat.
Holding clip
Center pin
Push until the pin is flat.
1Low Beam Headlights
Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Models with LED headlights
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 530
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove. 4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise. 5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove. 3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise. 4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Tab Coupler
Bulb
Low Beam Headlights Models with halogen headlights
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights* M
ain ten
an ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 531
Fog Lights*
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Turn Signal Lights Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Side Marker Lights Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Parking/Daytime Running Lights Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Models with LED headlights
Models with LED headlights
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
531* Not available on all models
532
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
M ain
ten an
ce
1Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Center pin
Push until the pin is flat.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 532
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the opposite side from the light being replaced. Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel to the left. Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and pull the inner fender back.
3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
Models with halogen headlights and LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with halogen headlights and bulb type parking lights
Models with halogen headlights and LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with halogen headlights and bulb type parking lights
Holding Clip
Screw
Bulb
Socket
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs and Rear Side Marker/Taillights M
ain ten
an ce
1Brake Light, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs and Rear Side Marker/Taillights
Rear side marker/taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Clip
Push until the pin is flat.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 533
Brake Light, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs and Rear Side Marker/Taillights When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the cargo hook by squeezing the tabs on both sides.
2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Brake Light: 21 W Back-Up Light: 16 W Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber) Rear Side Marker/Taillight: LED
Holding Clip
TabsCargo Hook
Bulb Socket
533
534
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 534
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the lens by carefully prying on its left edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
Lens
Bulb
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 535
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
ain ten
an ce
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield.
Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade from the wiper arm.
Tab
535Continued
536
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 536
3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by pulling the tabbed end out.
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade. u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade. 6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab. 7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Top Retainer
Blade
Tab
Indent
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 537
Checking and Maintaining Tires
ain ten
an ce
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.
3WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the drivers doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 542
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
537
538
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
M ain
ten an
ce
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the drivers doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. 215/55R17 94V 215: Tire width in millimeters. 55: Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 17: Rim diameter in inches. 94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 538
Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the drivers doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
Label Example
Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure
Tire Size
Tire Sizes
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling M
ain ten
an ce
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 539
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Glossary of Tire Terminology
539
540
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
M ain
ten an
ce
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 540
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) M
ain ten
an ce
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 541
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Traction
Temperature
541
542
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
M ain
ten an
ce
1Checking Tires
High speed driving We recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
*1: Except Canadian models
Tire Size 235/45R18 94V Pressure Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Tire Size 235/40R19 96V Pressure Front: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Models with 235/45R18 tires*1
Models with 235/40R19 tires
Models with 235/45R18 tires*1
Models with 235/40R19 tires
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 542
Wear Indicators The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.
Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear Indicator mark
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement M
ain ten
an ce
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 543
Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist (VSA) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isnt possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.
543
544
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
M ain
ten an
ce
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
FRONT
Direction Mark
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 544
Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display*/ multi-information display* helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
Front
* Not available on all models
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires M
ain ten
an ce
1Winter Tires
NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.
3WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 545
Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires: Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: Install them on the front tires only. Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Follow the chain manufacturers instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
Models with 215/55R17 tires
Models with 235/45R18 tires
Models with 235/40R19 tires
545
546
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 546
Battery
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Please consult a dealer for more information.
3WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
Checking the Battery Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
The battery condition is being monitored by the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is a problem with the sensor, the warning message on the information display*/multi- information display* will let you know. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 189
The clock resets. 2 Clock P. 116
The navigation system* is disabled. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Charging the Battery Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 547
Remote Transmitter Care
ain ten
an ce
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
Replacing the Button Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips- head screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter. u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter.
3. Remove the button battery with the small flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
Master Keys with Remote Transmitter*
Screw Battery type: CR1620
Battery
547Continued* Not available on all models
548
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 548
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Smart Entry Remote*
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 549
Climate Control System Maintenance
ain ten
an ce
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
549
550
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 550
Cleaning
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Cleaning Seat Belts
Opening
Cleaning the Window
uuCleaninguInterior Care M
ain ten
an ce
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 551
The floor mats for the driver, and the rear passenger on the passengers side hook over the floor anchors, which keep the mats from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Floor Mats
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Front (driver side)
Rear (passenger side)
Maintaining Genuine Leather*
551* Not available on all models
552
uuCleaninguExterior Care
M ain
ten an
ce
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 552
Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: If driving on roads with road salt. If driving in coastal areas. If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. Fold in the door mirrors. Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers*.
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment. Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
Washing the Vehicle
Using an Automated Car Wash
Using High Pressure Cleaners
* Not available on all models
uuCleaninguExterior Care M
ain ten
an ce
1Applying Wax
NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 553
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicles paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicles paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly. Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
Applying Wax
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Cleaning the Window
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Continued 553
554
uuCleaninguExterior Care
M ain
ten an
ce
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 554
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 555
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools Types of Tools .................................. 556
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 557
Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine........................ 563 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak..........................................564
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 565 Jump Starting.................................... 566 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 569
Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 570
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ............................................. 572
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 572
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 573
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On ................................................. 574
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ....................... 574
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 575
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 576 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 579
Emergency Towing........................... 580
555
556
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 556
Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.
Types of Tools
Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle BarTool Case
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 557
If a Tire Goes Flat
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow these compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use the jack if it doesnt work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.
Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
2. Move the shift lever to (R .
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
All models
557Continued
558
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 558
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Tool Case
Spare Tire
Wheel Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 559
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
559Continued
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
560
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (load) or may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: Do not use while the engine is running. Use only where the ground is firm and level. Use only at the jacking points. Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 560
1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
How to Set Up the Jack
Jacking Points
Jacking Point
Jack Handle Bar
Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 561
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)
Replacing the Flat Tire
Continued 561
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
562
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1Storing the Flat Tire
3WARNING Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 562
1. Remove the center cap. 2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well. 3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Store the case in the trunk.
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressures Low appears on the multi-information display*, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
Storing the Flat Tire
Spacer Cone Wing Bolt
For compact spare tire
For full-size tire
TPMS and the Spare Tire
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 563
Engine Does Not Start
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
cklist
n display. ton message appears k P. 564 rating range. ange P. 141
ess. at all
again.
g, the engine cannot be started.
dealer.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 566
Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Che Starter doesnt turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the multi-informatio If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start But
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Wea uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its ope
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating R Check brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightn If the interior lights are dim or do not come on
2 Battery P. 546 If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 576
The starter turns over normally but the engine doesnt start. There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine
2 Starting the Engine P. 421, 423
Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinkin
2 Immobilizer System P. 133
Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 98
Check the fuse. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 579
If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 580
Models with multi-information display Models with smart entry system
563
564
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 564
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine wont start.
The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi- information display.
Start the engine as follows. 1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the smart entry remote should be facing you. u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the indicator stays on. u If you dont depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
Models with smart entry system
Models with multi-information display
All models
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 565
Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the transmission to utilize engine braking.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
Models with smart entry system
U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
Canadian automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
565
566
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 566
Jump Starting
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
3WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
Jump Starting Procedure Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15- volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.
Booster Battery
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Booster Battery
uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 567
4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Continued 567
568
uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 568
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
What to Do After the Engine Starts
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 569
Shift Lever Does Not Move
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat- tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever into (N . u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Releasing the Lock
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Slot
Cover
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
Release Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
569
570
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 570
Overheating
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the mark may damage the engine.
3WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
H
How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power. Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
H
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.
3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 571
Next thing to do 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the engine coolant
reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.
Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.
MAX
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
MIN
571
572
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 572
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minute. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again. u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 573
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed.
What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed. u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving. u The message should go off.
When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above.
Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
573
574
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 574
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on The brake fluid is low. There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system. If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 575
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers). u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.
575
576
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 576
Fuses
Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, Circuit protected and fuse rating
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
* Not available on all models
*2:Models with LKAS *3:Models without LKAS *4:4-cylinder models *5:6-cylinder models
Circuit Protected Amps 1 Battery 125 A
2
EPS 70 A Fuse Box Main 1 (60 A)
Fuse Box Option 1 (40 A)
ABS/VSA FSR 20 A*2
40 A*3
ABS/VSA Motor 40 A*2
30 A*3
3
4 Front Fog Light* (10 A) 5 Horn 10 A 6 Stop Light 10 A 7 FI Sub 15 A 8 DRL (7.5 A) 9 IG Coil 15 A
10 Injector*4
*5
(20 A)*4
*5
*6:Models with smart entry system *7:Models without smart entry system
Circuit Protected Amps 11 Hazard 15 A
12
Fuse Box Main 2 60 A Fuse Box Option 2 (40 A)
IG Main 1 30 A*6
50 A*7
IG Main 2*6
*7
30 A*6
*7
Sub Fan Motor 20 A*4
30 A*5
Headlight Low Beam Main 30 A Fuse Box 30 A
Wiper Motor 30 A Main Fan Motor 30 A Starter Motor*6
*7
30 A*6
*7
13 Rear Defogger 40 A 14 Heater Motor 40 A 15 FI Main 15 A
16 Heated Door Mirror*, *4
*5
(10 A)*4
*5
17 MG Clutch 7.5 A 18 DBW 15 A 19 Small Light 20 A 20 Interior Light 7.5 A
uuFusesuFuse Locations H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 577
*2:Models with LKAS *3:Models without LKAS
Circuit Protected Amps 21 Back Up 10 A 22 Audio 10 A 23 Fan Timer 7.5 A 24 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A 25 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A
26 ABS/VSA ECU*2
*3
7.5 A*2
*3
577Continued
578
uuFusesuFuse Locations
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 578
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
Circuit Protected Amps 1 A/C 7.5 A 2 DRL 7.5 A 3 4 5 Meter 7.5 A 6 SRS 7.5 A 7 Option* (7.5 A) 8 MISS SOL 10 A 9 Fuel Pump 20 A
* Not available on all models
10 ABS/VSA 7.5 A 11 12 Front Wiper 7.5 A 13 ACG 15 A
14 Rear Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment) (20 A)
15 Drivers Power Seat
Reclining* (20 A)
16 Moonroof* (20 A) 17 Front Seat Heaters* (20 A) 18
19 Passenger Side Door
Unlock 10 A
20 Driver Side Rear Door
Unlock* 10 A
21 Drivers Door Lock 10 A 22 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A 23 Drivers Door Unlock 10 A 24 SRS 10 A 25 Illumination 10 A 26 Key Lock 7.5 A 27 Parking Lights 10 A 28 Lumbar Support* (10 A) 29 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A 30 Washer 15 A 31 SMART* (10 A) 32 Drivers Power Window 20 A
Circuit Protected Amps
33 Front Passengers Power
Window 20 A
34 Rear Driver Side Power
Window* 20 A
35 Rear Passenger Side Power
Window* 20 A
36 Drivers Power Seat Sliding* (20 A) 37 ACCESSORY 7.5 A 38 39 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
40 Front Accessory Power Socket
(Console Panel) 20 A
41 Driver Side Rear Door Lock* 10 A 42 Door Lock 20 A a Audio* (7.5 A) b ACM* (20 A) c Rear Seat Heaters* (15 A) d Premium Amp* (20 A) e f
g Passengers Power Seat
Reclining* (20 A)
h Passengers Power Seat
Sliding* (20 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
uuFusesu Inspecting and Changing Fuses H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 576 to 578.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 579
Inspecting and Changing Fuses 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off. 2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
579
580
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 580
Emergency Towing
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 581
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 582 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number ......................................... 586
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 587 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 588
Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 589
Warranty Coverages ........................ 591 Authorized Manuals......................... 593 Customer Service Information......... 594
581
582
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 582
Specifications
Vehicle Specifications
*1: LX-S models *2: Except LX-S models *3: LX models *4: Except LX models
Model Honda Accord Coupe No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,189 lbs (1,900 kg)*1
4,255 lbs (1,930 kg)*2
Canada: 1,900 kg*3
1,930 kg*4
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)*1
2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)*2
Canada: 1,040 kg*3
1,055 kg*4
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) U.S.: 1,962 lbs (890 kg)*1
2,006 lbs (910 kg)*2
Canada: 890 kg*3
910 kg*4
Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Charge Quantity 15.0 16.8 oz (425 475 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8
4-cylinder models
* Not available on all models
Engine Specifications
Fuel
Washer Fluid
Displacement 144 cu-in (2,356 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK
DILKAR7G11GS DILKAR7H11GS
DENSO DXE22HQR-D11S
Fuel: Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 )
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Canada: 4.85
Light Bulbs
*5: Models with halogen headlights *6: Models with LED headlights *7: Models with bulb type parking lights *8: Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)*5
LED*6
Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)*5
LED*6
Fog Lights* LED Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Lights*5, *7
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights*5, *8 28/8W (Amber)
Front Turn Signal Lights*6 LED Front Side Marker Lights*6 LED Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors) * LED
Brake Lights 21W Rear Side Marker/Taillights LED Back-Up Lights 16W Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Lights 5W Trunk Light 5W Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
uuSpecificationsu In
fo rm
atio n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 583
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified HCF-2 Capacity Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 )
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
*1: Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models *2: Manual transmission models
Recommended Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) Change including filter
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.66 US gal (6.28 )*1
1.66 US gal (6.30 )*2 (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.64 ) in the reserve tank)
Tire
*3: U.S. LX-S and Canadian LX models *4: U.S. EX, EX-L models and Canadian EX models *5: Canadian Touring models
Regular
Size 215/55R17 94V*3
235/45R18 94V*4
235/40R19 96V*5
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front 33 (225 [2.3])*3, *4
33 (230 [2.3])*5
Rear 33 (225 [2.3])*3, *4
32 (220 [2.2])*5
Compact Spare
Size T135/90D16 102M*3, *4
T135/80D17 103M*5
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular
17 x 7 1/2J*3
18 x 8J*4
19 x 8J*5
Compact Spare 16 x 4T*3
17 x 4T*4, *5
583Continued
584
uuSpecificationsu
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 584
Vehicle Specifications
*1: Manual transmission models *2: Automatic transmission models
Model Honda Accord Coupe No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,387 lbs (1,990 kg)*1
4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)*2
Canada: 1,990 kg*1
2,030 kg*2
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)*1
2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)*2
Canada: 1,090 kg*1
1,145 kg*2
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)
Canada: 910 kg Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Charge Quantity 15.0 16.8 oz (425 475 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8
6-cylinder models
Fuel
Washer Fluid
Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B11 DENSO SXU22HCR11
Fuel: Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 )
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Canada: 4.85
Light Bulbs
*3: Models with halogen headlights *4: Models with LED headlights
Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)*3
LED*4
Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)*3
LED*4
Fog Lights LED Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights*3 28/8W (Amber) Front Turn Signal Lights*4 LED Front Side Marker Lights*4 LED Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)
LED
Brake Lights 21W Rear Side Marker/Taillights LED Back-Up Lights 16W Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Lights 5W Trunk Light 5W Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W Courtesy Lights 2CP
uuSpecificationsu In
fo rm
atio n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 585
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Capacity Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 )
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity Change 2.2 US qt (2.1 )
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
*1: Manual transmission models *2: Automatic transmission models
Recommended Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) Change including filter
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.66 US gal (6.3 )*1
1.72 US gal (6.5 )*2 (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.64 ) in the reserve tank)
Tire
*3: U.S. EX-L V6 models *4: U.S. Touring models and Canadian V6 Touring models
Regular
Size 235/45R18 94V*3
235/40R19 96V*4
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front 33 (225 [2.3])*3
33 (230 [2.3])*4
Rear 32 (220 [2.2])*3, *4
Compact Spare
Size T135/90D16 102M*3
T135/80D17 103M*4
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular
18 x 8J*3
19 x 8J*4
Compact Spare 16 x 4T*3
17 x 4T*4
585
586
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 586
Identification Numbers
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicles VIN, engine number and transmission number are shown as follows.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number
Manual Transmission Number
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Number
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Engine Number
Automatic Transmission Number
Manual Transmission Number
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 587
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
fo rm
atio n
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/251/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Audio System Bluetooth Audio Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Bluetooth Universal Transceiver Immobilizer System Keyless Access System*
Remote Transmitter Wireless Charger*
587* Not available on all models
588
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 588
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 589
Emissions Testing
fo rm
atio n
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.
Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has Readiness Codes, as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40F and 95F (4C and 35C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
589Continued
590
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 590
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 591
Warranty Coverages
fo rm
atio n
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.
591Continued
592
uuWarranty Coveragesu
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 592
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 593
Authorized Manuals
fo rm
atio n
Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
For U.S. Owners: Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
For Canadian Owners: Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
593
594
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 594
Customer Service Information
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following information: Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number P. 586
Date of purchase Odometer reading of your vehicle Your name, address, and telephone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners: Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands: Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: (787) 620-7546
uuCustomer Service Informationu In
fo rm
atio n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 595
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, visit www.gracenote.com. When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums. Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs to display on the HDD. Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates a year. More information about Gracenote, its features, and downloads are available at
Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)
www.honda.com (in U.S.) or www.honda.ca (in Canada). CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by Gracenote logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (Gracenote). The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Software) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music- related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (Gracenote Data) from online servers or
Gracenote END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non- commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.
595Continued
596
uuCustomer Service Informationu
In fo
rm atio
n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 596
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS.
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error- free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. Gracenote 2009
Requirements to access Pandora Latest version of the Pandora application
installed on your mobile device. (Visit the Apple iTunes store or Google Play Marketplace to download the latest version.)
Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone)
Connection to the internet via WiFi or cellular data network.
Android devices must be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices may be connected via Bluetooth or USB.
Disclaimer of Pandora
uuCustomer Service Informationu In
fo rm
atio n
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 597
Limitations Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without notice
Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying songs, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at http:// www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply.
Pandora is only available in the United States.
597
Index
598
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 598
Index
Operation ................................................ 433
A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 481 Accessories and Modifications ................. 500 Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 174 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)........... 85, 447 Additives
Coolant ................................................... 523 Engine Oil................................................ 517 Washer.................................................... 528
Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 517 Adjusting
Clock....................................................... 116 Front Seats .............................................. 161 Head Restraints........................................ 164 Mirrors .................................................... 159 Rear Seats................................................ 168 Steering Wheel ........................................ 158 Temperature.................................... 101, 105
AhaTM ......................................................... 264 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) .................................................... 180 Changing the Mode ................................ 180 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ............................................... 181
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 549
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 180 Sensor..................................................... 183 Synchronized Mode................................. 182 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 180
Air Pressure............................... 538, 583, 585 Airbags ........................................................ 41
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 47 After a Collision ........................................ 44 Airbag Care............................................... 53 Event Data Recorder.................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 44 Indicator.............................................. 51, 75 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 52 Sensors ..................................................... 41 Side Airbags .............................................. 48 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 50
AM/FM Radio.................................... 199, 239 Android Auto ........................................... 281 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 481
Indicator.................................................... 75 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 277 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 190 Audio System............................................ 186
Adjusting the Sound........................ 197, 232 Audio/Information Screen................ 193, 216 Audio/Information Touch Screen ............. 218 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 188 Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout ................................................... 221
Closing Apps........................................... 231
Display Setup .................................. 198, 233 Error Messages ....................................... 286 General Information................................ 291 Home Screen .......................................... 224 Internet Radio ......................... 207, 262, 264 iPod ........................................ 204, 255, 294 Limitations for Manual Operation ............................. 234, 344, 377
MP3/WMA/AAC ............. 201, 210, 252, 265 Playing a CD ................................... 201, 252 Recommended CDs ................................ 292 Recommended Devices ........................... 294 Remote Controls ..................................... 190 Security Code ......................................... 189 Selecting an Audio Source ...................... 234 Status Area ............................................. 230 Theft Protection ...................................... 189 USB Flash Drives...................... 210, 265, 294 USB Port(s) .............................................. 187 Wallpaper Setup ............................. 195, 222
Audio/Information Screen ............... 193, 216 Audio/Information Touch Screen............ 218 Authorized Manuals ................................ 593 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 128
Customize .............................. 112, 309, 332 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System).................................................... 148 Indicator ................................................... 83
Automatic Intermittent Wipers .............. 153 Automatic Lighting.................................. 146
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 599
Automatic Transmission Creeping................................................. 429 Fluid ....................................................... 526 Kickdown ............................................... 429 Operating the Shift Lever .................. 20, 435 Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 569 Shifting................................................... 434
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 188 Average Fuel Economy .................... 100, 104 Average Speed ......................................... 105
B Battery ...................................................... 546
Charging System Indicator ................ 71, 572 Jump Starting ......................................... 566 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 546 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 547
Belts (Seat).................................................. 34 Beverage Holders ..................................... 173 Bluetooth Audio............................. 213, 268 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ............ 343, 374 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 65 Brake System ............................................ 479
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 481 Brake Assist System................................. 482 Fluid ....................................................... 527 Foot Brake .............................................. 480 Indicator ........................................... 70, 574 Parking Brake.......................................... 479
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 70
Brake System Indicator (Red) ..................... 70 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 154 Bulb Replacement .................................... 529
Brake Lights, Back-Up Lights, Rear Turn Signal Lights and Rear Side Marker/Taillights .... 533
Fog Lights................................................ 531 Front Side Marker Lights .......................... 531 Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights........ 532 Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Lights .................................................... 532
Headlights ............................................... 529 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 534 Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 531 Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 534 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights .................................................... 531
Bulb Specifications ........................... 582, 584
C Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 66 Cargo Hooks ............................................. 177 Carrying Cargo.................................. 413, 415 CD Player ........................................... 201, 252 Center Pocket ........................................... 172 Certification Label .................................... 586 Changing Bulbs......................................... 529 Charging System Indicator ................. 71, 572 Child Safety ................................................. 54
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 132
Child Seat.................................................... 54 Booster Seats ............................................ 65 Child Seat for Infants................................. 56 Child Seat for Small Children..................... 57 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 61
Larger Children ......................................... 64 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 56 Selecting a Child Seat................................ 58 Using a Tether........................................... 63
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 552 Cleaning the Interior................................ 550 Climate Control System............................ 180
Changing the Mode ................................ 180 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 181
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 549 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 180 Sensors ................................................... 183 Synchronized Mode................................. 182 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 180
Clock.......................................................... 116 Clutch Fluid............................................... 527 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM)................................................. 483
Coat Hook................................................. 177 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 483
Compact Spare Tire .................. 557, 583, 585 Compass .................................................... 409 Console Compartment ............................. 171
599
600
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 600
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Creeping ................................................. 429 Fluid ........................................................ 525 Kickdown ................................................ 429 Operating the Shift Lever ................... 19, 431 Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... 569 Shifting.................................................... 430
Controls ..................................................... 115 Coolant (Engine)....................................... 523
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank ...................................................... 523
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 524 Overheating............................................. 570
Creeping (Automatic Transmission /CVT) ........................................................ 429
Cruise Control ........................................... 442 Indicator .................................................... 81
Cup Holders............................................... 173 Customer Service Information ................. 594 Customized Features ................ 106, 298, 316
D Daytime Running Lights........................... 151 Dead Battery ............................................. 566 Defaulting All the Settings .............. 315, 339 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows.................................................. 181
Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 587 Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 145
Rearview Mirror....................................... 159 Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 518 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 145 Display Button .................................. 193, 216 Door Mirrors ............................................. 160 Doors ......................................................... 118
Auto Door Locking .................................. 128 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 128 Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 33, 77 Keys ........................................................ 118 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside .............................................. 126
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ........................................... 121
Lockout Prevention System...................... 125 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 540 Driving ...................................................... 411
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 447 Automatic Transmission/CVT ................... 429 Braking ................................................... 479 Cruise Control......................................... 442 Shifting Gear................................... 434, 438 Shifting Position ...................................... 430 Starting the Engine.......................... 421, 423
Driving Position Memory System ............ 156 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 549
E Eco Assist System ........................................ 9 ECON Button ............................................ 441
Elapsed Time ............................................ 104 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 77, 574 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 471 Emergency ................................................ 580 Emergency Engine Stop........................... 565 Emergency Trunk Opener ....................... 132 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 589 Engine....................................................... 586
Coolant .................................................. 523 Jump Starting ......................................... 566 Oil .......................................................... 517 Remote Engine Start ............................... 425 Starting........................................... 421, 423 Switch Buzzer ......................................... 140
Engine Coolant ........................................ 523 Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank ..................................................... 523
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 524 Overheating............................................ 570 Temperature Gauge.................................. 98
Engine Oil ................................................. 517 Adding ................................................... 520 Checking ................................................ 518 Displaying Oil Life ........................... 505, 509 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 71, 572 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 517
ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 141 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ............................................... 77, 574
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 601
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) ................................................ 66
Expanded View Drivers Mirror ............... 160 Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 552 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 160
F Features .................................................... 185 Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 549 Oil .......................................................... 521
Flat Tire..................................................... 557 Floor Mats ................................................ 551 Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 526 Brake/Clutch ........................................... 527 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .................................................... 525
Engine Coolant ....................................... 523 Manual Transmission .............................. 525 Windshield Washer ................................. 528
FM/AM Radio ................................... 199, 239 Fog Light Indicator .................................... 80 Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 168 Foot Brake ................................................ 480 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 44 Front Seats................................................ 161
Adjusting ................................................ 161 Front Sensor Camera ............................... 445
Fuel ...................................................... 22, 497 Economy ................................................. 499 Gauge ....................................................... 98 Instant Fuel Economy....................... 100, 105 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 75 Range.............................................. 101, 104 Recommendation .................................... 497 Refueling................................................. 497
Fuel Economy............................................ 499 Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 22, 498
Message.................................................. 573 Fuel Fill Door....................................... 22, 498 Fuses .......................................................... 576
Inspecting and Changing......................... 579 Locations......................................... 576, 578
G Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 499 Gauge ....................................................... 98 Information ............................................. 497 Instant Fuel Economy....................... 100, 105 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 75 Refueling................................................. 497
Gauges ........................................................ 98 Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........................... 434 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ..................................................... 430
Manual Transmission ............................... 439
Glass (care)........................................ 550, 553 Glove Box.................................................. 171
H Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 529 Handling the Unexpected........................ 555 HandsFreeLink (HFL)....................... 343, 374
Auto Answer........................................... 358 Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History.................................... 360, 388
Automatic Transferring............................ 358 Displaying Messages................................ 403 Displaying Text Messages ........................ 371 HFL Buttons..................................... 343, 374 HFL Menus ...................................... 345, 378 HFL Status Display ........................... 344, 376 In Case of Emergency.............................. 407 Limitations for Manual Operation .... 344, 377 Making a Call.................................. 364, 396 Options During a Call ...................... 369, 400 Phone Setup.................................... 350, 383 Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 392 Receiving a Call ............................... 368, 399 Receiving a Text Message ........................ 370 Receiving a Text Message/E-mail.............. 401 Ring Tone........................................ 359, 387 Selecting a Mail Account ......................... 402 Speed Dial....................................... 361, 389 To Create a Security PIN .......................... 357
601
602
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 602
To Set Up Text Message Options.............. 355 To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options ... 386
Hazard Warning Button............................... 4 HD RadioTM ................................................ 239 Head Restraints......................................... 164 Headlights ................................................. 145
Aiming .................................................... 529 Auto High-Beam...................................... 148 Automatic Operation ............................... 146 Dimming ......................................... 145, 151 Operating ................................................ 145
Heaters (Seat)............................................ 179 High Beam Indicator................................... 79 Hill Start Assist System...................... 422, 427 HomeLink Universal Transceiver ............ 340 HondaLink ............................................... 270
I Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission.......................... 586 Vehicle Identification ............................... 586
Ignition Switch.......................................... 140 Illumination Control
Knob ....................................................... 154 Immobilizer System .................................. 133
Indicator .................................................... 80 Indicators..................................................... 70
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) ..... 85 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (White) ............................................ 85, 448
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 75 Auto High-Beam (Amber) .......................... 83 Auto High-Beam (Green) ........................... 83 Brake System (Amber) ............................... 70 Brake System (Red).................................... 70 Charging System ............................... 71, 572 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)................................................. 87
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 81, 443 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 81, 442 Door and Trunk Open ............................... 77 ECON Mode...................................... 81, 441 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System ............................................ 77, 574
Fog Light................................................... 80 High Beam ................................................ 79 Immobilizer System ................................... 80 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber)................................................... 86
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (White) ............................................ 86, 466
Light Control............................................. 82 Lights On .................................................. 79 Low Fuel ................................................... 75 Low Oil Pressure................................ 71, 572 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 78, 475, 477 Maintenance Minder ......................... 81, 505 Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 71, 573 Parking Brake and Brake System........ 70, 574 Parking Sensor System............................... 77 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ............. 84
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 35, 74 Security System Alarm............................... 80 Smart Entry System ................................... 82 Starter System........................................... 82 Supplemental Restraint System ........... 51, 75 System Message ....................................... 79 Transmission ............................................. 74 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning............... 79 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System ............................................ 76, 471
VSA OFF.......................................... 76, 472 Washer Level ............................................ 81
Information .............................................. 581 Information Display ................................... 99 Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 100, 105 Instrument Panel........................................ 69
Brightness Control .................................. 154 Interior Lights........................................... 169 Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 159 iPod ........................................... 204, 255, 294
J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 560 Jump Starting ........................................... 566
K Key Number Tag ...................................... 119 Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 125
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 603
Keys........................................................... 118 Lockout Prevention ................................. 125 Master Keys ............................................ 118 Number Tag............................................ 119 Remote Engine Start ............................... 425 Remote Transmitter ................................ 123 Types and Functions................................ 118 Valet Key ........................................ 119, 131 Wont Turn ............................................... 25
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission /CVT)........................................................ 429
L Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 464 LaneWatchTM ............................................ 473 Language (HFL) ................................ 344, 376 LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 59 Lights ................................................ 145, 529
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 148 Automatic............................................... 146 Bulb Replacement ................................... 529 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 151 Fog Lights ............................................... 147 High Beam Indicator ................................. 79 Interior.................................................... 169 Light Switches......................................... 145 Lights On Indicator.................................... 79 Turn Signals ............................................ 145
Load Limits ............................................... 415
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 118 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 128 From Inside.............................................. 126 From Outside........................................... 121 Keys ........................................................ 118 Using a Key ............................................. 125
Lockout Prevention System...................... 125 Low Battery Charge.................................. 572 Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 75 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 71, 572 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength .................................................. 120
Lower Anchors ............................................ 59 Lubricant Specifications Chart ......... 582, 584 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 415
M Maintenance ............................................. 501
Battery .................................................... 546 Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 527 Cleaning.................................................. 550 Climate Control System ........................... 549 Coolant ................................................... 523 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 505 Oil ........................................................... 518 Precautions.............................................. 502 Radiator .................................................. 524 Remote Transmitter ................................. 547 Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 529
Safety...................................................... 503 Service Items ................................... 507, 511 Tires ........................................................ 537 Transmission Fluid ................................... 525 Under the Hood ...................................... 513
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 71, 573 Manual Transmission ............................... 438 Map Lights ................................................ 170 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 415 Meters, Gauges........................................... 98 Mirrors ...................................................... 159
Adjusting ................................................ 159 Door ....................................................... 160 Exterior ................................................... 160 Interior Rearview ..................................... 159
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 500 Moonroof ................................................. 139 MP3 ................................... 201, 210, 252, 265 Multi-Information Display ....................... 102 Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 496
N Numbers (Identification).......................... 586
O Odometer ......................................... 100, 104
603
604
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 604
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 517 Adding .................................................... 520 Checking ................................................. 518 Displaying Oil Life ............................ 505, 509 Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 71, 572 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 517 Viscosity .................................................. 517
Open Source Licences ............................... 297 Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 515 Moonroof................................................ 139 Power Windows ...................................... 136 Trunk....................................................... 129
Outside Temperature Display .......... 101, 105 Overheating .............................................. 570
P Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) ...................................................... 432
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift Mode) ...................................................... 436
Pandora ........................................... 209, 262 Panic Mode ............................................... 135 Parking ...................................................... 491 Parking Brake............................................ 479 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator ............................................ 70, 574
Parking Sensor System.............................. 492 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 52 Passing Indicators ..................................... 145
Playing Bluetooth Audio ................ 213, 268 Power Windows ....................................... 136 Precautions While Driving
Rain ........................................................ 428 Pregnant Women ....................................... 39 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 557
R Radiator .................................................... 524 Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 199, 239 Radio (SiriusXM) ..................................... 244 Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 200, 242 Range ................................................ 101, 104 RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 200, 242 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 589 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ..................................................... 155
Rear Seat (Folding Down) ........................ 168 Rear Seat Access ....................................... 167 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 159 Refueling .................................................. 497
Fuel Gauge................................................ 98 Gasoline.................................. 497, 582, 584 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 75
Regulations............................... 477, 540, 587 Remote Engine Start ................................ 425 Remote Transmitter ................................. 123 Replacement
Battery .................................................... 547 Bulbs....................................................... 529
Fuses .............................................. 576, 578 Tires........................................................ 543 Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 535
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 588 Resetting a Trip Meter..................... 100, 104 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 460
Indicator ................................................... 84 On and Off ............................................. 461
S Safe Driving ................................................ 29 Safety Check ............................................... 33 Safety Labels .............................................. 67 Safety Message ............................................ 1 Seat Belts .................................................... 34
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 36 Checking .................................................. 40 Fastening .................................................. 37 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 61
Pregnant Women...................................... 39 Reminder .................................................. 35 Warning Indicator ............................... 35, 74
Seat Heaters ............................................. 179 Seats.......................................................... 161
Adjusting ................................................ 161 Front Seats.............................................. 161 Rear Seat Access ..................................... 167 Rear Seats............................................... 168 Seat Heaters ........................................... 179
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 605
Security System ........................................ 133 Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 80 Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 80
SEL/RESET Button ..................................... 103 Select/Reset Knob ...................................... 99 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 58 Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 192 Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 436
Operation ............................................... 437 Shift Lever .......................... 19, 430, 434, 438
Operation ......................... 19, 431, 435, 438 Releasing ................................................ 569 Wont Move ........................................... 569
Shift Lever Position Indicator .... 72, 431, 435 Shifting (Transmission) ............ 430, 434, 438 Side Airbags ............................................... 48 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 50 Siri Eyes Free ........................................... 285 SiriusXM Radio ....................................... 244 Smart Entry Remote......................... 118, 425 Smart Entry with Push Button Start System ..................................................... 121
Snow Tires ................................................ 545 Song By VoiceTM (SBV).............................. 258 Spare Tire ................................. 557, 583, 585 Spark Plugs ....................................... 582, 584 Specifications ........................................... 582 Specified Fuel ........................... 497, 582, 584 Speedometer .............................................. 98 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 44
Starting the Engine .......................... 421, 423 Does Not Start ......................................... 563 Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 140 Jump Starting .......................................... 566 Remote Engine Start ................................ 425
Steering Wheel Adjusting................................................. 158
Stopping.................................................... 491 Summer Tires ............................................ 545 Sunglasses Holder ..................................... 178 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 44 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ............................................. 4, 5, 140
SYNC Mode ............................................... 182 System Message Indicator .......................... 79
T Tachometer ................................................. 98 Temperature
Outside Temperature Display ........... 101, 105 Temperature Sensor ................. 101, 105, 183 Time (Setting) ........................................... 116 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..................................................... 475 Indicator ............................................ 78, 575
Tires ........................................................... 537 Air Pressure ............................. 538, 583, 585 Checking and Maintaining....................... 537 Inspection................................................ 537
Labeling .................................................. 538 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 557 Regulations ............................................. 540 Rotation .................................................. 544 Spare Tire................................ 557, 583, 585 Summer .................................................. 545 Tire Chains .............................................. 545 Wear Indicators ....................................... 542 Winter..................................................... 545
Tools.......................................................... 556 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 417
Equipment and Accessories ..................... 418 Load Limits.............................................. 417
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 420 Emergency .............................................. 580
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .................................................... 475 Indicator............................................ 78, 575
Transmission ............................. 430, 434, 438 Automatic ............................................... 434 Continuously Variable (CVT) .................... 430 Fluid................................................ 525, 526 Manual ................................................... 438 Number................................................... 586 Shift Lever Position Indicator...... 72, 431, 435
Trip Meter......................................... 100, 104
605
606
In d
ex
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 606
Troubleshooting ....................................... 555 Blown Fuse ...................................... 576, 578 Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 26 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 26 Emergency Towing .................................. 580 Engine Wont Start .................................. 563 Noise When Braking .................................. 27 Overheating............................................. 570 Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 557 Shift Lever Wont Move ........................... 569 Warning Indicators .................................... 70
Trunk ......................................................... 129 Lid ........................................................... 129 Light Bulb ........................................ 582, 584 Main Switch ............................................ 131
Turn Signals............................................... 145 Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 79
U Unlocking the Doors................................. 121 Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ........ 13 USB Flash Drives........................ 210, 265, 294 USB Port(s)................................................. 187 Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System...................................................... 121
V Valet Key ........................................... 119, 131 Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 586 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA).................. 471
Off Button............................................... 472 Off Indicator.............................................. 76 System Indicator........................................ 76
Ventilation................................................ 180 Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 517, 583, 585 Voice Control Operation.......................... 235
Audio Commands ................................... 237 Climate Control Commands .................... 238 General Commands ................................ 238 Music Search Commands ........................ 238 On Screen Commands............................. 238 Phone Commands................................... 237 Useful Commands................................... 237 Voice Portal Screen.................................. 236 Voice Recognition ................................... 235
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 471
W Wallpaper ......................................... 195, 222 Warning and Information Messages... 88, 90 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 572 Warning Labels........................................... 67 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) .............................................. 591
Watts ................................................. 582, 584 Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 542 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 560 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 275
Window Washers ..................................... 152 Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 528 Switch .................................................... 152
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 136 Windshield ............................................... 152
Cleaning ......................................... 550, 553 Defrosting/Defogging ............................. 181 Washer Fluid........................................... 528 Wiper Blades........................................... 535 Wipers and Washers ............................... 152
Winter Tires Snow Tires .............................................. 545 Tire Chains.............................................. 545
Wipers and Washers ................................ 152 Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 153 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades..... 535
Wireless Charger ...................................... 175 WMA................................. 201, 210, 252, 265 Worn Tires ................................................ 537
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 607
16 US ACCORD 2D (KA KC KL)-31T3L6300.book 608
Related manuals for Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Accord Coupe Honda works, you can view and download the Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Navigation Manual for Honda Accord Coupe as well as other Honda manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Navigation Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Honda Accord Coupe. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Honda Accord Coupe 2016 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.